Order Number: MGCS030301C0

H21

Digital Imaging Systems

DP-2310/3010

[ Version 1.02 ]

! WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

© 2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder;

Distinction of PbF PCB:

PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.;
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.

The contents of this Service Manual are subject to change without notice.
Published in Japan.

2
 Table of Contents

Specifications Table................................... 5 System Description................................ 222

1.1. Copy Function...........................................5 6.1. Printing Process ................................... 222
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions .14 6.2. Precaution with Consumables.............. 223
1.3. System Combination...............................23 6.3. New Image Stabilizing Technology ...... 225
1.4. Options List.............................................24 6.4. Mechanical Operation .......................... 228
1.5. External View..........................................25 6.5. Automatic Document Feeder ............... 230
1.6. Control Panel ..........................................28 6.6. Receive Mechanism............................. 234
1.7. Fans and Motors.....................................29 6.7. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations..... 243
1.8. Clutches and Switches ...........................30
1.9. PC Boards ..............................................30 Installation ............................................. 250
7.1. Precautions During Set Up................... 250
Disassembly Instructions ......................... 31 7.2. Unpacking ............................................ 252
2.1. General Disassembly..............................31 7.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 252
2.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................32 7.4. Adjustment ........................................... 260
2.3. Screw Identification Template.................74
Options and Supplies ............................ 261
Maintenance, Adjustments 8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update"
and Check Points..................................... 78 for PCL or PS Option Installation ........ 261
3.1. Preventive Maintenance .........................78 8.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module
for PCL6 (DA-PC300) .......................... 265
3.2. Required Tools .......................................80
8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ..............81
for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC300) .................. 267
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .......83
8.4. Installing the Network Scanner Module
3.5. Resetting the P/M (DA-NS600).......................................... 269
(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .........85
8.5. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module
3.6. Lubrication Point List ..............................86 (DA-NF600) .......................................... 271
3.7. Updating the Firmware ...........................89 8.6. Installing the Fax Communication Board
3.8. Adjusting the Printer Registration, (DA-FG300).......................................... 275
LSU Image Side to Side .........................98 8.7. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit
3.9. Calibrating the LCD ..............................100 (DA-HD30) ........................................... 283
8.8. Installing the Accounting Software
Troubleshooting ..................................... 101 (DA-WA10) ........................................... 290
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........101 8.9. Installing the DD Server Software
(DA-WS20) ........................................... 291
4.2. Improper LCD Display ..........................102
8.10. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............103
(DA-EM600) ......................................... 292
4.4. Document Feeder (ADF) ......................121
8.11. Installing the Sorting Image Memory
4.5. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......126 16 / 64 / 128 MB
4.6. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................134 (DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B) ...................... 294
4.7. Information Codes Table 8.12. Installing the Expansion Flash
(For Facsimile)......................................146 Memory Card 4/8 MB
(UE-410047/410048)............................ 296
4.8. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........152
8.13. Installing the 3rd Paper Tray
4.9. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................159
(DA-DS303) / 4th Paper Tray
(DA-DS304) and the Stand for 4-Paper
Service Modes ....................................... 161 Tray Configuration (DA-DA230-PA) ..... 297
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)..................161 8.14. Installing the Plain Stand
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............192 (DA-DA310 / DA320) for USA Only...... 301
8.15. Installing the Plain Stand
(DA-DA310-PA / DA320-PA)................ 303

3
 Table of Contents

8.16. Installing the 1-Bin Finisher Finisher Option (DA-FS300) .................. 379
(DA-FS300)...........................................305
11.1. General Description ............................. 379
8.17. Installing the Exit Tray [Inner]
11.2. Maintenance and Inspection ................ 382
(DA-XN200) ..........................................311
11.3. Operation and System Description ...... 392
8.18. Installing the Exit Tray [Outer]
(DA-XT200)...........................................313
8.19. Installing the Automatic Document
Feeder(DA-AS200) and the Inverting
Automatic Document Feeder
(DA-AR250) ..........................................315
8.20. Installing the Platen Cover
(DA-UC200) ..........................................321
8.21. Installing the Key Counter Harness
Kit (DA-KH200) .....................................322
8.22. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................324
8.23. Replacing the Laser Unit (LSU) ............328

General Network Information................. 332

9.1. Network Protocol ..................................332
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology..........334
9.3. Network Layer.......................................338
9.4. Transport Layer ....................................342
9.5. Upper Layer ..........................................344
9.6. SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ............349
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................350
9.8. Communication Protocols.....................356
9.9. POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ...........359
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................362
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail
Account Type (SMTP or POP)..............363
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) - Extended Feature .................364
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications
(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................367
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................371
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature ...............................371
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for
Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature ...............................373
9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer
- Extended Feature ...............................375

Schematic Diagram ............................... 377

10.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................377
10.2. Finisher Circuit Diagram .......................378

4
 DP-2310/3010

1 Specifications Table
1.1. Copy Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Basic Specifications
1 Type Desktop
2 Platen Fixed
3 Original Position
Platen Left / Rear
ADF / i-ADF Left / Center
4 Recording Paper Path Center
5 Face Up / Face Down Face Down
6 Drum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
7 Copy Process Dry Electrostatic System
8 Developing Process Dry Dual Components
9 Toner Recycle No
10 Fusing System Heat & Pressure
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
11 Max Original Size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
12 Paper Size
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
For EU
Paper Tray A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
For EU
Bypass A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
Bypass Envelope No
13 Warm-up Time Approx. 35 sec 68 °F (20 °C)
From Platen/ Letter/ A4
Portrait/ 1st Paper Tray.
Period between Start Key is
14 First Copy Time Less than 4.5 sec
pressed and Paper exits to
the lower Inner tray.
When LSU is ready.
15 Copy Speed
Ledger / A3 15 / 16 cpm 18 / 19 cpm
Legal / B4 / FLS 17 / 17 / 18 cpm 21 / 21 / 23 cpm From 1st Paper Tray, exit to
Letter-R / A4-R 20 / 19 cpm 25 / 24 cpm Lower Inner Tray and
Letter / A4 23 cpm 30 cpm Continuous Copy.
Invoice-R / A5 / A5-R 23 cpm 30 cpm
16 Zoom
Enlargement Selected Original size / Copy size
Reduction Selected Original size / Copy size
Zoom 25 - 400% 1% Step

5
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
17 Paper Feed Front Loading Universal Paper Tray
Paper Tray
Capacity 550 sheets x 2 LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Auto Size Setting No Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Warning Empty Only
Bypass
Capacity 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Auto Size Setting Yes
Paper Capacity
1,150 sheets
(Std. Configuration)
18 Multi Copy Range 999 sheets
19 Gradation
Text Bi-Level
Text / Photo 256 steps Halftone by Error Diffusion
Photo 256 steps
20 Resolution 600 dpi Scanning and Printing.
Standard Sorting Memory
21 16 MB
Size
22 Standard Page Memory Size 32 MB
23 Exit Tray Capacity Standard: 250 sheets
24 Color No
25 Dimensions
23.58 x 27.83 x 27.44 in
(W x D x H) H: To Platen Glass.
(599 x 707 x 697 mm)
26 Operating Space
38.50 x 27.83 in Includes Bypass Paper Tray.
(W x D)
(978 x 707 mm)
158.73 lb (72 Kg) Main Unit
28 Weight
180.78 lb (82 Kg) Main Unit with i-ADF mounted
Options
1 Paper Feed System Max. 550 sheets x 4
550 sheets 3rd
Yes Motor is mounted.
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection Manual Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Paper Warning Empty Only
550 sheets 4th
Yes Motor is not mounted.
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection Manual Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Paper Warning Empty Only
Max. Paper Capacity 2, 250 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

6
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
2 Cabinet
Stand for
Option Base Plate with Casters
4-Paper Tray Configuration
Stand for
Option Low Plain Stand
3-Paper Tray Configuration
Stand for
Option High Plain Stand
2-Paper Tray Configuration
For EU and Other
3 Platen Cover Option
Destinations
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
4 ADF
For EU and Other
Single Side Type Option
Destinations
Original Set Face Up
Scanning Method Sheet Through
Capacity (Original) 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
SADF Mode Yes
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
5 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Standard For USA and Canada
Duplex Type For EU and Other
Option
Destinations
Original Set Face Up
Scanning Method Sheet Through
Capacity (Original) 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Available for single side
SADF Mode Yes
scanning only.
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
6 Exit Tray (Inner)
Tray Position Inner
Number of Bins 1
Face Up / Face Down Face Down
Bin Capacity Upper / Lower bins: 250 sheets
Requires the Optional Exit
Tray (Inner).
Multi Tray Function Option (Inner 2-way)
Max. 3 way using Optional
Exit Tray (Outer) or Finisher.
Shift Tray Function No
Not available with Exit Tray
7 Finisher Option
(Outer).
Tray Position Outer
Number of Bins 1
Face Up / Face Down Face Down
Bin Capacity 500 sheets LTR, LTR-R, A4, A4-R, B5
250 sheets LDR, LGL, A3, B4, FLS
Max. 3 way using Optional
Multi Tray Function Yes Exit Tray (Inner) and Exit Tray
(Outer) or Finisher.

7
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Shift Tray Function Yes
No Manual Stapling.
Not available with Rotation.
Staple Function Yes
Not available with INV, INV-R,
A5, A5-R or B5-R.
Stapler Capacity 3,000 pins
LTR, LTR-R, A4, A4-R, B5 :
Max. Number of Pages 30 sheets
30 sheets / set
Stapled LDR, LGL, A3, B4, FLS: 20
sheets
Staple Position Rear / Upper 1 Position
Punch Function No
8 Exit Tray (Outer) Option Not available with Finisher.
Tray Position Outer
Number of Bins 1
Face Up / Face Down Face Down
Bin Capacity 250 sheets LTR / A4
Max. 3 way using Optional
Multi Tray Function Yes
Exit Trays (Inner and Outer).
Shift Tray Function No
For Exit Tray (Inner or Outer),
9 Dual-Path Exit Guide Unit Standard
Finisher and Duplex printing.
To be used for Exit Tray
10 Paper Transport Unit Standard (Outer), Finisher and Duplex
printing.
11 Automatic Duplex Unit Standard
12 Counter
The Harness Kit contains only
Key Counter Capability Option Harnesses, Bracket and a
Screw.
13 Dehumidifier Option Supplied as a Service Part.
14 Sorting Image Memory
Optional Image Memory 1
Yes Unit comes standard with
(16MB)
16MB.
Optional Image Memory 2
Yes 1-Slot available for an
(64MB)
Optional Image Memory
Optional Image Memory 3 module.
Yes
(128MB)
Additional Optional Sorting
Image Memory (Minimum 16
15 Hard Disk Drive Option MB) is required for the Hard
Disk Drive to function. (For
Tandem, Remote Copy, etc.)
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection Yes
Auto Paper Selection Yes
Auto Paper Tray Selection Yes

8
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Reservation while Power On
Auto Start Yes
Initial
Energy Saver Automatically enters the
Standby Mode Yes (140Wh) Sleep or Shutdown Mode
after 15 minutes from the
Standby or Energy Saver
Mode.
Manually enters the Energy
Energy Saver Mode Yes (28W) Saver Mode by pressing the
Energy Saver key.
Sleep or Shutdown mode is
controlled by the General
Functions setting.
Sleep Mode Yes (18W) Turns Off the Heater Power.
100 VAC Power Supply
Yes (3W) Network Function not
available
Shutdown Mode
220 VAC Power Supply
Yes (4W) Network Function not
available
Requires the Fax
Communication Board
Remote Diagnostic Yes (DA-FG300) option or the
Internet Fax / E-MAIL Module
(DA-NF600) option.
Machine Stops when Out of
Yes PPC Function
Toner
2 Additional Features
Low Level Paper Warning Empty Only
Photo Mode Yes 256 steps
Manually overridden when
Original Detection Release Yes
using the Original Size keys.
Edit / Effects
Book Mode Yes
Edge Mode Yes
Margin Mode Yes
X-Y Zoom Yes 25 - 400%
Stamping
Available only when using the
Page, Date, Issue Yes
ADF.
2-Sided Copy Yes
Inverse Mode (Negative /
Yes
Positive)
Centering Mode Yes With Digital Sky Shot
Mirror Mode No
Image Repeat Yes

9
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Others (Inverting ADF &
ADU)
LDR → LTR x 2
2-Page Copy Mode Yes
(A3 → A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)
2 in 1 Yes
4 in 1 Yes
6 in 1 Yes For USA and Canada
For EU and
8 in 1 Yes
Other Destinations
Copy from four 1-Sided
Booklet Mode Yes pages to 1 Booklet Mode
sheet.
Duplex Copy
1→2 Yes
2→1 Yes Available only when using the
2→2 Yes i-ADF.
Book→2 Yes
1st Page BLANK Yes 1 → 2/2 → 1/2 → 2
1st Page IMAGE Yes Book → 2
Image Rotation (90 or 270 °) Yes
Electronic Sorting Yes
Rotation Sorting Yes
Insertion Job
Cover Mode Yes
Page Insertion Mode Yes Available when using the ADF
OHP Interleave Mode Yes or i-ADF.
Presentation Mode Yes
Department Counter Yes 300 Departments
ADF
LDR and LTR, LGL and
Multi Size Feed Yes LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and
B5, A4-R and A5
JOB Build and SADF
Yes
Mode
Original Counter No
Job Memory Yes 5 Jobs in Memory
Job Time Display Yes
Concurrent Copy Yes 12 Concurrent Copy Jobs
Tandem Copy Mode Yes
Remote Copy Mode Yes
Scan Once Print Many Mode Yes
Job Complete Notice Yes
Trial Copy Mode Yes
Weekly Timer Yes
Function Mode Yes
Interrupt Yes

10
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Electronic Counter Yes
Digital Sky Shot Mode Yes
Check / Slip Mode Yes
3 Control Panel
Display Wide Touch Panel LCD
GREEN : Scanning /
Status Lamp Yes Printing
RED : Alarm / Warning
Key
Original Size Yes
Copy Size Yes
Keypad Yes
Clear Yes
Stop Yes
Start Yes
Energy Saver Yes
Multi Size Feed No
Sort / Finish No
Function Mode Yes
Original Detection No
Release
Interrupt Yes
Reset Yes
One-Touch key No
Copier / Printer / NW Scanner
Mode Change Yes
/ Fax and Internet Fax Mode
LCD Main Indication
English (American) For USA and Canada
Message Language
(Default) For EU and Other
Specified Language
Destinations
Original Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Tray Selection Yes
Selected Paper Tray /
Yes
Tray Status
Original Mode Selection Yes Text / Text-Photo / Photo
Copy Density Selection Yes
Setting Confirmation Yes
Function Classification Yes
Zoom Magnification Yes
Number of Copies Yes
JOB Build and SADF /
Yes
Multi Size Feed Mode
Error Code Yes

11
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Finishing Yes
Warning Indicators Yes
Add Toner Yes
Toner Waste Container
Yes
Full
Add Paper (No Paper) Yes
Add Paper
No
(Under 50 sheets)
Paper Jam Indication Yes
Paper Jam Location Yes
Service Alert Call Yes
User Error Yes
Machine Error Yes
History of Jam Errors Yes
4 Main Unit
Total Counter Yes (Standard) Mechanical Counter
Max. Weight of Documents
11.02 lb (5 kg)
on the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide Yes
Clip Pocket Yes
Operating Instructions
No
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label Specified Language
5 Optical System
Original Detection Method Reflective Photo Sensor Type
Scanning Method 600 dpi CCD
Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part
Mechanical Multi Copy No
Mode
6 Process System
Separate OPC Unit and
Type
Developer Unit Type
Toner 15K
Drum Life 60K
Developer Life 120K
Toner Waste Container Yes
Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part
Manually adds toner to the
Manual Add Toner Yes developer
(up to TDC threshold)

12
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 DP-3010
Efficiency
1 Productivity
ADF Productivity (LTR / A4)
ADF 100%
Inverting ADF 100%
ADU Copy Productivity
(LTR / A4) Throughput
Transport Method Stack less
1→2 When exiting to lower Inner
Tray from 1st Tray.
1 copy 70% 57% When LSU is ready.
5 copies 90% 80%
10 copies 95% 85%
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM 120 k
Minor PM (Cleaning) 60 k
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension 28.58 x 32.91 x 42.91 in
(726 x 836 x 1090 mm)
2 Packing Weight 218.26 lb (99 kg)
3 Accessories
Process Unit Yes
Developer No
Toner No
Toner Waste Container No
Outer Tray No Option
Operating Instructions Yes
Power Supply
99 - 138 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
100 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
1 Power Requirement
180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
220 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
2 Power Consumption Less than 1500 W
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature 50 - 80 °F / 10 - 30 °C
2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%
UL1950 / CSA C22.2 No.950 For USA and Canada
3 Safety For EU and
EN60950
Other Destinations
4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant
Class A computing device in FCC Rules
5 EMI For USA and Canada
Part 15
This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) Refer to the Parts Manual for
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)
PCBs details

13
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions
1.2.1. Fax Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility G3 ITU-T Std & Non-Std
2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line Only
3 Leased Line Port No
4 V.24 Line Port No
5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4kbps T.30/V.34/V.17/V.33/V.29/V.27ter
6 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM
8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)
ITU-T Image No. 1
9 Transmission Speed Approx. 3 sec
(A4, Std Resolution)
Transmission
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600 dpi communication is only
Communication Resolution
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi available between WORKiO DP-2310/
10 dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
Reception 3010/3510/4510/6010 and other T.30
mm)
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) compliant machines.
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)
2 Scanning Speed (ADF)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
mm)
0.6 sec 0.4 sec
Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ A4, Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal
mm) Direction.
S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x Excluding Initializing Time and ADF
15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x 1.1 sec 0.8 sec slipping factor.
lines/mm)
600dpi: 600 x 600 1.7 sec 1.2 sec
Scanning Speed (Platen)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
600dpi: 600 x 600 1.7 sec 1.2 sec
Std 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Scanning Resolution Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
3 dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/ S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
mm) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
4 Document Size (Max.) ADF: Ledger / A3

14
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
5 Effective Scanning Width LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
6 A3 size TX/RX Yes Conforms to ITU-T A3
7 Reduction XMT Yes A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
Face-Up, feed from top page
8 ADF Capacity 50 sheets
LTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m2)
9 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method LP
23 / 30 ppm Recording Speed attained after the 1st
2 Recording Speed
(A4 Horizontal) copy.
3 Recording Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi
Invoice : Not supported.
Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size
Ledger / Legal / Letter / for N. American models. If A3 is
4 Recording Paper Size
A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 received, approx. 1" of image on both
edges are not printed on Ledger size
paper.
5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A3
Optional max. 2250 sheets
6 Recording Paper Capacity 1,150 sheets
LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Toner Bottle, Developer,
8 Consumable
OPC Drum and Staples
Fax Memory
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1
1 Standard Memory 2 MB (120 pages)
(A4, Std Resolution)
4 MB (+320 additional pages) Expansion Flash Memory Card, using
2 Optional Memory
8 MB (+640 additional pages) ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation Yes
2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes
3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes
Number of Memory Job
4 Yes Max. 50 files
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
Plus an additional 800 stations
available to select from, when the
1 Auto Dialers 200 Stations
optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD30) is
installed.
Phone Book Directory
2 Yes
Search Dialing
200 Address Book + 70 Full Number
3 Total Auto Dialers 270 Stations
Dialing
4 Program Dials 12
5 Max. Tel Number Digits 36
Max. Station Name
6 15
Characters
Full Number Dialing
7 Yes Max. 70 stations
(Buffered Dialing)

15
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Direct Dialing
8 Yes Voice mode
(Monitor Dialing)
9 Automatic Redialing Yes Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min. intervals
10 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button
11 Line Monitor Speaker Yes
12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only
13 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF
14 Pulse to Tone Change No
15 Flash Key Yes
16 Handset No
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission Yes
2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission
Quick Memory
3 Yes
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4 Yes Max. 270 stations
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5 No ADF Deferred Transmission
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max. 50 timers
Deferred Multi-Station
7 Yes
Transmission
8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes Priority ADF Transmission
Priority Memory
9 No
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)
90 Degree Rotation
11 Yes
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet Yes
13 Confidential Mail Box No
14 Multi-Copy Transmission No
FAX : Back-up with Flash Memory.
15 Memory Back-Up Yes Copy / Printer : No Back-up with D-
RAM
16 Duplex Scanning Yes With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception Yes
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
2 Fixed Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
3 Auto Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
4 Overlap Printing Yes Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)
5 Receive to Memory Yes
Distinctive Ring Detector
6 No
(DRD)

16
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
90 Degree Rotation
7 Yes
Reception
8 Duplex Printing Yes
Polling
1 Polling Yes
2 Turnaround Polling No
3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 270 stations
4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 timers
Deferred Multi-Station
5 Yes Max. 50 timers / 270 stations
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx No
7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File
8 Preset Polling Password Yes
Temporary Polling
9 Yes
Password
10 Continuous Polling Yes
Convenience
1 Panel Display Wide Touch Panel Display
2 Voice Contact No
3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode
4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode
5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp Yes
2 Header / Total Page Print Yes
3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions / with View Mode
4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List -
2 ABBR. No. List -
3 Program List Yes
4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List
5 Fax Parameter List Yes
6 File List Yes With View Mode
7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes
8 Directory Sheet No
Identifications
1 Logo Yes 25 Characters
2 Multiple Logo No
3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters
4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits

17
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV No
2 Selective Reception No TSI Check
3 Relay XMT Request No
4 Relay XMT Center No
5 Confidential XMT / Polling No
6 Confidential Center No
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling No
8 Mailbox Center No
9 File XMT No
Received File Transfer
10 Fax Forward Yes
(Only with I-FAX Option)
11 Sub-Address XMT Yes T. Routing
12 Sub-address RCV No
13 OMR-XMT No
Standards
FCC Part 68: 1997 / Industry
1 PSTN Canada
No. CS-03: Issue 8 1996
Others
1 Fax Access Code Yes
2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only
3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 5 Files
4 Department Code Yes 300 Departmental Codes
5 Power Saver Mode Yes
6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes
Remote Diagnostic
7 Yes
Function
8 Check & Call Function Yes
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No

18
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.2.2. Printer Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port Yes USB
4 IEEE-1394 No
Printer Function
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
1 Printing Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EU
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
2 Bypass Yes
3 Stapling Yes Requires Optional Finsher
Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing,
600 x 600
4 Printing Resolution (dpi) the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6
(with Smoothing)
Printers (1200 dpi Interpolated).
5 Interface USB / Ethernet
Win 98 / Win Me /
6 OS Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only.
Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.1
7 GDI Yes
8 PDL (PCL6) Yes Requires Optional PCL6 Emulation Kit.
Requires Optional PS / PCL6
9 PDL (PS3) Yes
Emulation Kit
Custom Size/Post Card Size is not
10 Duplex Printing Yes
available.
11 Collation Stack Yes
12 Status Monitor No
13 Network Printing Yes
14 Network Status Monitor Yes
15 Smoothing Yes
16 Applicable PC IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC MAC is PS only.
17 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
Yes
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV
Yes
into Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
Yes
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory
Yes
while Printing
Output to separate tray for
18 Yes
Printing, Fax, Copy
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS / PCL6
19 Font Yes
Emulation Kit
Requires Optional HDD Unit
20 Security Print Yes
Max. 100 Boxes

19
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.2.3. Network Scanner Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port No
4 IEEE-1394 No
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std
2 Scanning Speed (ADF) 30 opm Resolution), JBIG, 600 dpi
Excluding Data XMT Time.
3 Halftone 256 Halftone shades With Error Diffusion
4 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
600 x 600
Scanning Resolution
5 300 x 300 Selectable, 600 dpi Optical Scanner
(dpi)
150 x 150
6 Win 98 / Me /
OS
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
7 2-Sided Scanning Yes With i-ADF.
TIFF can also be converted to PDF
8 File Format Mult-page TIFF / PDF
with the PDMS Software
9 Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen
Completion Notice Yes
(requires WEB Status Monitor)
10 Protocol TCP/IP, Non-Std

20
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.2.4. Internet Fax Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
Main Specifications
1 Communication Protocols SMTP / POP3 / MIME
2 Max. Modem Speed NA
3 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Selectable
4 File Format TIFF / PDF PDF file is only available if sending to
PC (Network Scanner).
5 Line Interface RJ-45 Ethernet LAN
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
2 Effective Scanning Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Std 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning
Scanning Resolution
3 S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) Resolution is available with
dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/mm)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) Parameter setting
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi
2 Effective Recording Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Transmission Features
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and
1 Multi-Task Operation Yes
LAN is available.
2 Memory Transmission Yes
Sequential Multi-Station
3 Yes
Transmission
Max. 270 stations
Simultaneous Multi-Station
4 Yes (200 Address Book + 70 Full Number
Transmission
Dialing)
5 Sender Selection Yes
G3 / Email Mixed
6 Yes
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission Yes
Received File Transfer, only with I-FAX
8 Fax Forward Yes
Option
Inbound Routing, only with I-FAX
9 Sub-address RCV Yes
Option
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print Selection Yes All or From / To / Subject only
Subject Line Random Entry

21
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Description
Items Remarks
DP-2310 / 3010
LAN Features
A3 Communication is available with
1 Internet Fax Communication Yes
Parameter setting.
2 Internet Mail Reception Yes
3 Internet Fax Server Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes iFAX → iFAX → G3FAX
Email Relay MXT Yes PC → iFAX → G3FAX
Received Fax / Email Yes Local print available
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission No
Using Sub-Address.
Inbound Routing Yes
Local print available
Phone Book Registration from
Yes Via Email
PC
I-Fax Parameters
4 Yes
Registration via Email
5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN
6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi
7 Network Printing
LPR / LPD Yes 600 dpi
GDI Yes 600 dpi
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
PDL Yes
Emulation Kit
8 DHCP Client Yes
9 LDAP Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Certainty
Email from RCV side to Panasonic
1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes
I-FAX's only
ID
1 Email Address Yes

22
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.3. System Combination

Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

ADF PC Board

Scanner Unit Document Sensor

(SDR PC Board) Motor

Panel
(PNL PC Board)
Main PC Board PCL6 Fax Communication
(SC PC Board) MJR
Emulation Option Option (FXB)

PS/PCL6 Printer
Emulation Option

Network USB
Scanner Option Interface
Key Counter
Automatic Internet Fax/
Harness Option 10/100 Ethernet
Duplex Unit
E-Mail Option Interface

Dehumidifier
Heater Kit Electronic Sorting Memory

Expansion Flash Image Memory

Memory Card 16, 64, 128MB
4 or 8M
Either Option
Hard Disk Option

1-Bin Finisher
or Dual-Path Exit Guide
Exit Tray (Outer) Solenoid, Sensor IPC Board
Unit

SPC PC Board
Paper Transport Unit Motor, Sensor, SL
(EXFD PC Board)

2nd Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)

3rd Paper Tray (CST3 PC Board)

4th Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)

Standard Configuration

Option

23
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.4. Options List
■ Options
Option Name Option Number Remarks
Printer Controller Module (PCL) DA-PC300 Printer Controller for PCL6*
Multi Page Description Language
DA-MC300 Printer Controller for PCL6/PS3*
Controller Module (PCL/PostScript)
Network Scanner Module DA-NS600 For Network Scanning
Internet Fax / E-Mail Module DA-NF600 Internet Fax/Email Communication
Fax Communication Board DA-FG300 G3 Fax Communication
Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD30 Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory
(Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard
Disk Drive to function.
(For Tandem, Remote Copy, etc.)
Expansion Board DA-EM600 F-ROM Board (8 MB)
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB UE-410047
Additional Memory for Fax / I-Fax
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8MB UE-410048
Image Memory (16MB) DA-SM16B
Image Memory (64 MB) DA-SM64B For Electronic Sorting
Image Memory (128MB) DA-SM28B
DD Server Software DA-WS20 For DD Server Function
Accounting Software DA-WA10 For Accounting Function
1-Bin Finisher DA-FS300
Exit Tray (Outer) DA-XT200
Exit Tray (Inner) DA-XN200
Platen Cover DA-UC200
Automatic Document Feeder DA-AS200 Available in Specified Destinations
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder DA-AR250
3rd Paper Tray DA-DS303
4rd Paper Tray DA-DS304
Plain Stand (High) DA-DA310
Plain Stand (Low) DA-DA320 Available in Specified Destinations
Base Plate with Casters DA-DA230
Key Counter Harness Kit DA-KH200* DZTY000161 is not available by
Supply rout / policy change.
■ Supplies
Part Name Part Number Remarks
Toner DQ-TU15E 15K
Staple Cartridge FQ-SS32
OPC Drum DQ-H60E
Developer DQ-Z120E
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.

24
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.5. External View
1. Standard Configuration

(For USA Only)

Product complies with DHHS Rules 21
CFR Subchapter J in effect at date
of manufacture.

Top View Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID

23.58 in (599 mm) 27.83 in (707 mm)

33.86 in (860 mm)

27.44 in (697 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

! CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
INCORRECTLY REPLACED.
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS.

2. With Optional System Console Configuration

Top View
14.84 in
(377 mm)
45.98 in (1168 mm)
(308 mm)
12.05 in

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

25
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3. Space Requirements With Options
Copier

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

23.58 in (599 mm) 14.2 in (379 mm)

27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

46.38 in
(1178 mm)

Copier + Outer Exit Tray

3.46 in (88 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm)

10.83 in (275 mm) 14.92 in (379 mm)

23.58 in (599 mm)
27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

60.67 in
(1541 mm)

Copier + Finisher
3.94 in (100 mm)

9.88 in 14.84 in 23.58 in (599 mm) 14.92 in (379 mm)

(251 mm) (377 mm)
27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

71.06 in
(1805 mm)

26
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.5.1. Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters “I” and “O”)

For Example:
39H = DP-2310-PU 39K = DP-2310-PB
39J = DP-3010-PU 39L = DP-3010-PB

Production Facility

Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T

A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)
B : 02 L : 12
C : 03 M : 13
D : 04 N : 14
E : 05 O : 15
F : 06 P : 16
G : 07 Q : 17
H : 08 R : 18
I : 09 S : 19
J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)

Production Month

A : January G : July
B : February H : August
C : March I : September
D : April J : October
E : May K : November
F : June L : December

27
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.6. Control Panel
For USA and Canada

For Other Destinations

28
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.7. Fans and Motors
Transport Motor (1320)
ADF Motor (1801)

Scanning Motor (201)

Main Motor (907)

Fan (459)

LVPS Fan (322)

Toner Motor (958)

LSU Fan (315)

Lift DC Motor (1152)

29
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
1.8. Clutches and Switches
ADF Roller
Clutch (1788)
Intermediate
Clutch (969)

Feed 2 Roller
Clutch (1787)
Micro Switch (461)

Registration Roller
Clutch (957)
Sheet Bypass Feed
Roller Clutch (1105)
Paper Feed Roller
Clutch (1105)
Intermediate Roller
Clutch (957)
ILS PCB (19124) Paper Feed Roller
(Front Cover Sensor) Clutch (1105)

1.9. PC Boards
SDR PCB (1903) SNS PCB (1981)
ADF PCB (1907) LFB PCB (1969)
PNL3 PCB (113) PNL4 PCB (114)
CCD (207)
EXFD PCB (1978)
MJR PCB (1915) PNL1 PCB (1908)
PNL2 PCB (123)

FXB PCB (1916) CDS PCB (1986)

DC PCB (1905)

ACD PCB (1904)

NFL PCB (1909)
SNS PCB (1981)
RLB PCB (1917)
LED PCB (1982)
Optional LVPS (1912)
WTS PCB (1982)
LVPS (1910)
SC PCB (1901)
DCB PCB (1906)
HSU PCB (1974) HVPS (1911)
CST2 PCB (1913)
SPC PCB (1902)

30
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1. General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.

31
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2. Disassembly Instructions
2.2.1. Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit
(1) Open the ADF Cover (1831).
(2) Remove 4 Silver Screws (B1).

(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (1604).

(4) Slightly pull the right edge of the ADF Rear
Cover upward.
(5) Release the Latch Hooks.
(6) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (1601).

(7) Lower the ADF Input Tray back in place.

(8) Disconnect the AMT Harness (1951) from the
Clutch.
(9) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).
(10) Remove the ADF Roller (1728) Assembly.

(11) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).

(12) Remove the Clutch (1788).
(13) Remove the Bushing (1621).
(14) Remove the Rear ADF Guide (1725).

32
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(15) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).

(16) Remove the Pin (744).
(17) Remove the ADF Shaft (1724).
(18) Remove the ADF Roller (1728).

(19) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).

(20) Remove the Pre-Feed Roller Shaft (1730).
(21) Remove the Pre-Feed Roller (1731).

(22) Remove 1 Silver Screw (B1).

(23) Remove the ADF Front Cover (1637).
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks in alphabetical order and
in the direction as shown by each arrow.

(24) Remove 4 Screws (19).

(25) Remove the Upper ADF Guide (1723).

(26) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).

(27) Remove the Torque Limiter Bushing (1741)
and Torque Limiter Spring (1742).
Note:
When re-installing the Torque Limiter Assembly,
ensure that the Torque Limiter Spring is placed
into the deeper slot of the Separation Roller.

(28) Remove the Separation Roller (1740).

(29) Disconnect the APNT Harness (1956) and
remove Sensor (1045) (Original Detection
Sensor).

33
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(30) Disconnect all Connectors on the ADF PC

Board.
(31) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(32) Remove the ADF PC Board (1907).

(33) Remove 2 Screws (24).

(34) Remove the ADF Motor (1801).

(35) Remove 6 Screws (19).

(36) Remove the Sensor Bracket (1663).

(37) Remove 4 Screws (19).

(38) Remove the Motor Bracket (1811) and Gear
Bracket (1802) Assemblies.
Note:
Apply Molykote EM-50L Grease to all Gears and
Shafts except to the following: E26S35 Drive Gear
(1805), E26S35 Gear F (3305), ADF Motor (1801),
and the shafts of Drive Shaft 2 (1817) and Exit
Roller (1751).

34
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

< Cleaning ADF Roller, Pre-Feed Roller, Drive

Roller and Feed 2 Roller>

(1) Open the ADF Cover (1831).

(2) Clean the ADF Roller (1728), Pre-Feed Roller
(1731), Drive Roller (1872) and the Feed 2
Roller (1753) with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.

< Cleaning Exit Roller and Inverting Feed Roller>

(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (1604).

(4) Open the ADF Exit Cover (1854).
(5) Clean the Exit Roller (1751) and the Inverting
Feed Roller (1853) with a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol.

35
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.2. Control Panel Unit
(1) Pull the Battery Holder (104) part of the way
out.
(2) Release the Latch and remove the Battery
Holder (104) out.

(3) Remove 6 Silver Screws (B1).

(4) Remove the Left Platen Cover (514) and the
Right Platen Cover (516).
(5) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1).

(6) Slightly lift the Control Panel Assembly.

(7) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board
(CN220, CN221, CN222 and CN224).
(8) Remove 1 Screw (21) to disconnect the Ground
Connector.
(9) Remove the Control Panel Assembly.

(10) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN223, CN225, CN229 and CN230).

36
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Remove 4 Screws (F10).

(12) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1908).

(13) Remove 7 Screws (F10).

(14) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL2 PC Board
(CN251).
(15) Remove the PNL2 PC Board (123).
Note:
After re-assembling the Control PNL2 PC Board,
make sure that the Battery Holder is
re-installed.

(16) Disconnect the Harness on the INV PC Board

(CN2).
(17) Remove 2 Screws (P5).
(18) Remove the INV PC Board (129).

(19) Remove 2 Screws (P5).

(20) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper
Control Panel Cover (122).

37
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(21) Remove 1 Screw (P5).

(22) Remove the PNL4 PC Board (114).

(23) Remove 4 Screws (P5).

(24) Remove the PNL3 PC Board (113).

(25) Remove 2 Screws (H4).

(26) Remove 2 Screws (H4).
(27) Remove the LCD Module (128).

(28) Remove the Touch Panel (127).

38
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.3. Scanner Unit
(1) Remove the Left and Right Platen Covers
(514, 516) and the Control Panel Assembly.
(Refer to 2.2.2.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(3) Remove the Glass Assembly (557).

(4) Remove the Glass S (559).

(5) Holding by the center, slowly move the Lamp

Base Assembly to the center of the Scanner
Base Frame in the direction shown by the arrow.

(6) Remove 4 Screws (19).

(7) Remove the F/R Scanner Frame (240).

39
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(8) Remove 2 Screws (19).

(9) Remove the 2 Lamp Plate Springs (232).
(10) Disconnect the Harness on the LFB PC Board
(CN181).
(11) Remove the Scanning Lamp (204).

(12) Remove 2 Mirror Plate Springs (230).

(13) Remove Mirror 1 (264).
Note:
Observe the position of the Mirror 1 before
removing it. The Black Mark on the Mirror,
indicates non-reflective side. When re-installing,
make sure the smooth side of Mirror 1 with the
Black Mark is pointing downwards.

(14) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC

Board (CN1 and CN2).
(15) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(16) Remove the Inverter Upper Cover (212).

(17) Remove 2 Screws (19).

(18) Remove the Inverter PC Board (268).

40
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(19) Remove 2 Red Screws (D24).

(20) Remove the FPC Cable Holder A (215)
Assembly.

(21) Holding by the center, slowly move the Lamp

Base Assembly towards the left of the Scanner
Base Frame.
(22) Disconnect the Harness on the LFB PC Board
(CN181).
(23) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(24) Remove the FPC Cable Holder B (216)
Assembly.

(25) Remove 2 Sliders on the Connectors.

(26) Remove the FPC Cable (260).
Note:
The Sliders must be re-installed when
reassembling.

<Removing the Scanner Motor>

(27) Remove 4 Silver Screws (S6).

(28) Open the Rear Cover.
(29) Remove 4 Silver Screws (S6).
(30) Remove the Rear Right Cover (507) and the
Right Rear Cover (518).

41
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(31) Remove the E-Ring (5Y).

(32) Remove the Synchro Belt (208).

(33) Remove the MXL34 Pulley (217).

(34) Remove 1 Screw (6P).
(35) Remove the Fan (459).

(36) Disconnect the Harness on the Scanning Motor.

(37) Remove 3 Screws (19).
(38) Remove the Motor Bracket (249) Assembly.
Note:
When re-installing the Motor Bracket, tighten the
upper screw first.

(39) Remove 2 Screws (36).

(40) Remove the Scanning Motor (201).

42
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(41) Disconnect the Harness on the SC PC Board

(CN106).
(42) Release 2 Latch Clips and remove the Ferrite
Core.

(43) Remove 3 Red Screws (D24).

(44) Remove the CCD Assembly (207).

Note:
When re-installing the CCD Assembly, align the
hole with the Red Mark on the CCD Assembly with
the hole on the Scanner Base Frame as illustrated
and secure it with 3 Red Screws.

(45) Remove 1 Screw (6P).

(46) Remove the CN Bracket (511) Assembly.

43
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(47) Remove 2 Screws (19).

(48) Remove the SDR PC Board (1903).

(49) Remove 6 Screws (19).

(50) Remove the F/R Scanner Frame (240).

(51) Remove 2 Red Screws (D24).

(52) Remove the Rear Lamp Belt Lock (228).
(53) Remove the Front Lamp Belt Lock (227).
(54) Remove the Lamp Base Bracket (224)
Assembly.

(55) Remove the 3 Sliders (211).

44
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(56) Remove 2 Screws (18).

(57) Remove the Rear Mirror Belt Lock (238).
(58) Remove the Front Mirror Belt Lock (236).
(59) Remove the Mirror 2 Bracket (233) Assembly.

(60) Remove the 4 Mirror 2 Plate Springs (206).

(61) Remove the two Mirror 2 (265).

(62) Remove the 3 Sliders (211).

<Re-installing the Lamp Base Assembly and the

Mirror 2 Bracket Assembly>

(1) Remove 2 Screws (19).

(2) Remove the Right Scanner Frame (242).
Note:
When re-installing the Right Scanner Frame,
tighten the 2 Screws after re-installing both sides
of the F/R Scanner Frame.

45
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install the Mirror 2 Bracket (233) Assembly.

(4) Re-install the 2 Inner Timing Belts (202).
Note:
The Bracket must be adjusted by moving it
towards the center until it stops against the
notches in the frame.

(5) While holding each side of the Bracket against

the notch, secure the Rear Mirror Belt Lock
(238) and the Front Mirror Belt Lock (236) with
2 Screws (18).

(6) Install the Lamp Base Bracket (224) Assembly.

Note:
The Bracket must be adjusted by moving it
towards the right edge until it stops against the
notches in the frame. Make sure that the Mirror 2
Bracket Assembly is positioned in the notches in
the center of the frame.

(7) While holding each side of the Bracket against

the notch, secure the Rear Lamp Belt Lock
(228) and the Front Lamp Belt Lock (227) with
2 Red Screws (D24).

46
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(8) Clean the Mirror 1 (264) and both the Mirror 2

(265) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.

47
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.4. Process Unit
(1) Open the Right Cover (1201).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (6P).
(3) Remove the Harness Cover (1525).
(4) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm (1218) and
the Front Arm (1217).

(5) Open the Right Cover and hook the Angled

Rear Arm into the lower Hook Hole.

(6) Open the Front Cover (528).

(7) Remove the Toner Waste Container (618).

(8) Remove the Toner Bottle (617).

(9) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(10) Remove the Connector Cover (Clear Blue)
(538).

48
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Disconnect the Harness.

(12) Loosen the Process Unit Screw (743).
(13) Slide the Process Unit out.
Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
the Right Cover is still open before pulling the
Process Unit out.

Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(14) Remove 1 Screw (1Y).

(15) Remove the Front Lock Plate Assembly (751)
(longer plastic tab).
(16) Remove 1 Screw (1Y).
(17) Remove the Rear Lock Plate Assembly (752)
(shorter plastic tab).

(18) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction

of the arrow and remove.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

49
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(19) Remove the Harness from clamp, disconnect

the Connector.
(20) Remove 2 Screws (51) and 1 Snap Ring (G6).
(21) Remove the Hopper Unit.

Note:
When re-installing the Hopper Unit, insert the
hooks into the recessed holes on the Developer
Unit as illustrated.

(22) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the

Developer Cover (825).

<Removing the Old Developer and Toner>

(23) Stand the Developer Unit as illustrated over a

suitable container and dump the used Developer
and Toner by rotating the Gear.
(24) Clean the Developer Unit with a dry soft cloth.
(25) Re-install the Hopper Unit.

50
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(26) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).
(27) Pour the appropriate developer evenly into the
developer unit. Make sure to empty the bottle.
(28) Close the Developer Cover.

Note:
When re-installing the Developer Cover, ensure
that 2 Magnet Roller Sheets are outside as
illustrated.

<Removing the Old OPC Drum>

(29) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.
(30) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the right side where
the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was
installed.
Note:
Do not touch the surface of the OPC Drum with
bare hands when removing or re-installing it.
Grease from fingerprints will affect copy quality.
When installing a new OPC Drum, clean the Bias
Charge Roller with a soft dry cloth.

(31) Remove the Bias Charge Roller (725).

(32) Remove 2 Screws (20).

51
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(33) Remove the Cleaning Roller (706).

(34) Remove 2 Bias Charge Roller Holder (728)

Assemblies.

Note:
When re-installing the Bias Charge Roller Holder
Assembly on the rear side, install the Bias Charge
Roller Holder (728) first and then the Bias Charge
Roller Bushing (726) with the Bushing Coil Spring
(727) as illustrated.

(35) Remove 2 Screws (23).

(36) Remove the Cleaning Blade (704).
(37) Remove the Scoop Sheet (710).

52
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.5. Fuser Unit

CAUTION:
To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is
hot.

(1) Open the Right Cover (1201).

(2) Remove 1 Screw (6P).
(3) Remove the Harness Cover (1525).
(4) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm (1218) and
the Front Arm (1217).

(5) Remove 1 Screw (6P).

(6) Remove the Support Plate (476).

(7) Remove 1 Screw (6P).

(8) Remove the Strap Cover (1022).

(9) Disconnect the 3 Harnesses on the Terminals of

Fuser Unit.
Note:
When re-installing, make sure that the 3
Harnesses are connected correctly as illustrated.

53
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(10) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

(11) Remove 4 Screws (4N).
(12) Remove the Fuser Unit.

(13) Remove 4 Screws (6P).

(14) Remove the Dual-Path Exit Guide.

(15) Clean the Feed Roller (1510) with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(16) Clean the Feed Roller (1510) with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

54
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(17) Remove 3 Screws (4N).

(18) Remove the Lower Fuser Cover (1003).

<Removing the Web Cleaning Roller>

(19) Remove 2 Screws (21).

(20) Disconnect the Harness.
(21) Remove the Cleaning Web Roller Unit.

(22) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(23) Remove the Rear Web Bracket (1071).
(24) Remove the Cleaning Web Roller (1083) and
Web Pressure Roller (1080).

(25) Remove 2 Screws (36).

(26) Remove the Thermostat (1038).
(27) Remove 2 Screws (36).
(28) Remove the Thermal Fuse (1040).
(29) Remove 2 Screws (1Y).
(30) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1041).

55
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(31) Remove 3 Screws (23).

(32) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(33) Remove the Harness Guide (1004).

(34) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(35) Remove the Rear Lamp Holder (1021).

(36) Remove 2 Screws (16).

(37) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(38) Remove the Front Lamp Holder (1018).

56
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(39) Remove 2 Fuser Lamps (1043 and 1044).

Note:
Make sure to check the wattage of each Fuser
Lamp when replacing.

<Fuser Lamps Handling Precautions>

Note:
1. When re-installing, route the Harnesses along
the hooks as illustrated.
2. Be sure to install the longer Harness to the Gear
side and the shorter Harness to the other side.
3. Make sure that the 600W Fuser Lamp (White
Harness) is plugged into the upper left slot and
the 450W Fuser Lamp (Red Harness) is plugged
into the lower right slot.
4. Route the Harnesses (White, Black and Red)
along the 3 hooks as illustrated.
5. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp
with bare hands. Grease from the fingerprints will
shorten its life cycle, use a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints.
6. Use care when handling the Fuser Lamps to
avoid breakage.

(40) Remove 2 Screws (21).

(41) Remove the Front and Rear Roller Holders
(1056 and 1057).

57
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(42) Remove the Fuser Roller (1026) Assembly.

(43) Remove the 2 C-Rings (1078).

(44) Remove the E40 Heat Roller Gear (1014).
(45) Remove the Plate Spacer (1023).
(46) Remove the 2 Insulation Bushings (1006).
(47) Remove the 2 Bearings (1046).
Note:
1. The Plate Spacer is installed only to the non-
Gear side.
2. Do not scratch the surface of the Fuser Roller
when removing or re-installing it.

<Cleaning Insulation Bushings>

Clean the Insulation Bushings with a soft cloth,
saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

<Cleaning Fuser Roller>

Clean the surface of the Fuser Roller with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(48) Disconnect the Harness.

(49) Remove 2 Screws (23).
(50) Remove the Upper Fuser Cover (1002).

58
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(51) Remove the Exit Roller (1028).

(52) Remove the Turn Guide (1007).

(53) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(54) Remove the Upper Guide (1001).

(55) Remove 5 Upper Fingers (1067).

(56) Remove the Pressure Roller (1027).

59
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(57) Remove 2 Bearings (1039).

Note:
1. When re-installing, make sure to install with
Bearing's Retainer Ring facing towards the
Roller.
2. Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure
Roller when removing or re-installing it.

<Cleaning Pressure Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pressure Roller with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

60
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.6. Drive Unit
(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws (S6).
(2) Open the Rear Cover (302).

(3) Remove 4 Silver Screws (S6).

(4) Remove the Rear Right Cover (507) and the
Right Rear Cover (518).

(5) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1).

(6) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (506).
(7) Remove 1 Screw (24).
(8) Remove 5 Fly Wheels (922).

(9) Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to 2.2.4.)

(10) Remove 3 Screws (21).
(11) Remove the HVPS Unit.

61
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(12) Disconnect the MT Harness (1926) on the Main

Motor (CN1 and CN2).
(13) Remove 5 Screws (4N).
(14) Remove the Main Motor (907).

(15) Disconnect the Connector on each of the 3

Clutches.
(16) Remove 3 Snap Rings (S9).
(17) Remove 3 Clutches (969, 1105 x 2).
(18) Release The Harnesses from 4 Harness
Clamps.

(19) Remove 4 Screws (6P).

(20) Remove the RD Cover (411).

(21) Remove 1 Screw (6P) and 2 Screws (19).

(22) Remove the 1st Tray Drive Bracket (939).

62
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(23) Remove 3 Screws (19).

(24) Remove the Motor Bracket (908).

63
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.7. Right Cover
(1) Open the Right Cover (1201).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (6P).
(3) Remove the Harness Cover (1525).
(4) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm (1218) and
the Front Arm (1217).

(5) Hook the Angled Rear Arm (1218) into the

lower hook hole.

<Cleaning the CDS PC Board>

Clean the Sensor on the CDS PC Board with a dry
soft cloth.

(6) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (506).

(Refer to 2.2.6.)
(7) Disconnect 3 Connectors.
(8) Release the Harnesses from 3 Harness
Clamps.

(9) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm (1218).

(10) Push the Fulcrum Pin (1215) and then remove
the Right Cover (1201).
Note:
Please remove the Right Cover completely to
prevent damage that could cause duplex skewing
and jamming.

64
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Remove 1 Screw (19).

(12) Remove the Registration Pinch Roller (1222).

<Cleaning Registration Pinch Roller>

Clean the surface of the Registration Pinch Roller
with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(13) Remove the Roller Cleaner (1229).

Note:
When installing the Roller Cleaner, make sure that
turn a felt of black side upwards as illustrated.

(14) Remove 3 Screws (C8).

(15) Remove the BTR Guide (1223).

65
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(16) Remove the BTR Gear (1234).

(17) Remove the Bias Transfer Roller (1221).

<Cleaning Bias Transfer Roller>

Clean the surface of the Bias Transfer Roller only
with a soft dry cloth.

66
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.8. Sheet Bypass
(1) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (1Y).
(3) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).
(4) Remove the P6L5 Conductive Bushing (972).
(5) Remove the Dual-Path Guide (1203).

(6) Remove 1 Screw (19).

(7) Remove the Feed Roller (1244).

<Cleaning Feed Roller>

Clean the surface of the Feed Roller with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(8) Remove the Separator Pad (1242).

<Cleaning Separator Pad>

Clean the rubber surface of the Separator Holder
pad with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.

67
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.9. Paper Feed Module
(1) Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to 2.2.4.)
(2) Remove the Clutch (1105). (Refer to 2.2.6.)
(3) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).
(4) Remove the Registration Roller (1121).

<Cleaning Registration Roller>

Clean the surface of the Registration Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(5) Remove 2 Screws (19).

(6) Remove the Process Unit Guide (1104).

(7) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out.

(8) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (1144).

<Cleaning Paper Feed Roller>

Clean the surface of the Paper Feed Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(9) Remove the Reverse Clutch (1132).

(10) Remove the C25 Gear Roller (1145).

<Cleaning C25 Gear Roller>

Clean the surface of the C25 Gear Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

68
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Remove the Reverse Clutch (1132) and Spring

D (1178).
(12) Remove the C25 Gear Roller (1145).

<Cleaning C25 Gear Roller>

Clean the surface of the C25 Gear Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(13) Slide the 2nd Paper Tray out.

(14) Open the Jam Access Cover (2307).

(15) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(16) Remove the Paper Guide (1127).

(17) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (1144).

(18) Remove 2 Reverse Clutches (1132).
(19) Remove the Spring D (1178).
(20) Remove 2 C25 Gear Rollers (1145).

<Cleaning the Intermediate Roller and 2 C25 Gear

Rollers>
Clean the Intermediate Roller and 2 C25 Gear
Rollers with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.

69
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.10. LSU Unit
(1) Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to 2.2.4.)
(2) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out.
(3) Remove 1 Screw (19) and 2 Screws (6P).
(4) Remove the Front Left Cover (534).

(5) Remove the Blind Cover (530).

(6) Remove 2 Screws (S6).
(7) Remove the S Inner Cover (524).

(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(9) Remove 3 Screws (23).
(10) Remove the LSU (420).
(11) Remove 2 Screws (6P).
(12) Remove the LSU Fan (315) Assembly.

70
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.11. Paper Transport Unit
<Cleaning the Pinch Roller>
(1) Remove the Inner Tray (1522).

(2) Push open the Paper Transport Jam Cover

(1302).

(3) Clean 6 Pinch Rollers (1518) with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

71
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.2.12. PC Board
(1) Remove 7 Screws (6P).
(2) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC
Board.
(3) Remove the SC PC Board (1901).

(4) Remove 3 Screws (6P).

(5) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SPC PC
Board.
(6) Remove the SPC PC Board (1902).

(7) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws (L8: Upper)

and 2 Silver Screws (S6: Lower).

(8) Remove 2 Screws (6P).

(9) Open the LVPS Cover (301).

72
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(10) Remove 6 Screws (6P).

(11) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the ACD PC
Board.
(12) Remove the ACD PC Board (1904).

(13) Remove 2 Screws (6P).

(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the DC PC
Board.
(15) Remove the DC PC Board (1905).

(16) Remove 9 Screws (6P).

(17) Remove all the Harnesses on the LVPS
(18) Remove the LVPS (1910).

73
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2.3. Screw Identification Template

Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark

16 XYN3+J8 Screw

18 XYN3+J6 Screw

19 XTB3+8J Screw

20 XTB3+8F Screw

21 XTB3+6F Screw

23 XYN3+F8 Screw

24 XYN4+F8 Screw

36 XYN3+F6 Screw

51 XTB3+10F Screw

62 XTB3+6J Screw

1Y XTB3+10J Screw

4N XSN3+W8FC Screw

5M XYN3+F4 Screw

6P XTW3+6LFC Screw

7B XTB26+6J Screw

B1 DZPB000007 Silver Screw

B4 XTB3+8JK Black Screw

C2 DZPB000020 Screw

74
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark

C8 XTW3+8SFC Screw

D24 DZPA000013 Red Screw

D25 DZPA000014 Blue Screw

E5 XTB3+32J Screw

E6 XTB3+24J Screw

E8 XTW3+10S Screw

F4 DZPA000063 Screw

F7 XSN4+W10FN Silver Screw

F9 XTN3+10G Screw

F10 XTB3+8G Screw

H4 XTB26+8J Screw

L8 DZPB000031 Shoulder Screw

L9 XTB3+4F Screw

M2 DZPA000064 Tumb Screw

N3 XTB4+10F Screw

P1 B3x6TTS-RP Screw

P2 XTB3+12J Screw

P5 XTN3+8G Screw

75
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark

P7 FFPFA0152 Screw

S6 DZPA000086 Screw

S8 XTB3+12F Screw

T2 DZPA000087 Screw

T4 XYN3+F5FY Screw

T5 XTN3+6FR-C Red Screw

V4 XTW3+10LFN Silver Screw

743 DZPA000088 Screw

1033 DZPA000025 Shoulder Screw

64 XWG3 Washer

F6 DZPK000021 Washer

1052 XWG55E12FY Washer

5Y XUC4 E-Ring

5Z XUC6 E-Ring

J6 XUC3VM E-Ring

J7 XUC4VM E-Ring

J8 XUC7VM E-Ring

L7 XUC2VM E-Ring

76
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark

G6 FFPFJ0039 Snap Ring

H6 FFPFJ0033 Snap Ring

H7 FFPFJ0041 Snap Ring

S9 DZJM000171 Snap Ring

77
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine
cleaning and parts replacement.
It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals
for customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.

- You should prepare the necessary PM kits, replacement parts, and tools for
cleaning beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance service, you should discard the
used parts and packaging, in accordance with local regulations and clean
the surrounding area.
- Before servicing the equipment disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves
and eye protection.

1 Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive
Maintenance Check List (refer to 3.4) in the service manual.

2 Cleaning of Rollers
- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use of IPA (Isopropyl alcohol) should be used sparingly.

3 Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions

CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on
the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power
Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine.
- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful to avoid clothing
being caught by moving components.
- While electricity is applied, the connectors of any PC Board must not be
connected or disconnected.
- Use of a vacuum cleaner for the cleaning of the TDC sensor could cause
electrostatic damage, therefore, use a blower brush or cotton swab for the
cleaning of these parts. Before vacuuming the developer unit remove the TDC
sensor.
- When handling the drum, the precautions listed in section 3.3.
should be followed.
- Make sure to use the correct screw sizes.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical
continuity.
- To re-assemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.

78
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

4 Precautions for Handling Lasers

The laser optical system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by
a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not
stray or leak during photocopier operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert into the path of the laser, any screwdrivers or other tools that
have high reflectance properties.
2. Before servicing the photocopier, take off any watches, rings, or other metallic
objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser
entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)
Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, please follow the
above precautions for maximum safety.

5 The Safety Interlock Switches

- The service technician may defeat the safety interlock switches by inserting a
interlock cheater into the opening of the switch cover.
- Be sure to remove the interlock cheater from the switch cover after completion
of service.

79
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.2. Required Tools

No. Tools No. Tools

1 Soft Cloth 7 Pliers
2 Isopropyl Alcohol 8 Cotton Swab
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
5 Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
6 Tweezer

3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method

Important
No. Part Description Comments
Action
1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a pre-caution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
2 Auto Document Check & 1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Isopropyl
Feeder (ADF) Clean Alcohol when required.
3 Scanner Unit Check & 1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Seal Guide with
Clean Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
4 Transmitter Unit Check & 1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
Clean 2. Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
5 Mirrors Check & 1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands.
Clean Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with
Isopropyl Alcohol.
6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & 1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
Grease
8 Timing Belts Check & 1. Check the belts for looseness or abrasion.
Clean 2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.

80
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points
5 4 3 1 2 9 47

10
8
7 43
6

7
47
44

DETAIL B 43

46

45
DETAIL A 20
45
21
16
11
18
13
17
12 14 15

19
13
14 12 14 12 12 14 15

81
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

22 23 29 26 27 28 24

25

DETAIL A

40

32
41
34
42

36 35 33 37 38 30 31
DETAIL B

82
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List

Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref. Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle Cycle
No. Method Procedure Counter
(Sheet) (Sheet)
i-ADF/ADF Unit
1 ADF Roller 1728 60K Alcohol 120K Refer to F7-02-03
2 Pre Feed Roller 1731 60K Alcohol 120K 2.2.1.
3 Separation Roller 1740 60K Alcohol 120K
4 Torque Limiter 1741 60K Alcohol 120K
Bushing
5 Torque Limiter 1742 60K Alcohol 120K
Spring
Scanner Unit
6 Slider 211 - - 600K Refer to F7-02-02
7 Mirror 1 264 60K - - 2.2.3.
8 Mirror 2 265 60K - -
9 Glass L Assembly 557 60K - -
10 Glass S 559 60K - -
Paper Feed Module
11 Registration Roller 1121 60K Alcohol 480K Refer to F7-03-01/-
12 Reverse Clutch 1132 - - 120K 2.2.9. 02/-03/-04
13 Paper Feed Roller 1144 60K Alcohol 120K
14 C25 Gear Roller 1145 60K Alcohol 120K
15 Reverse Clutch 1146 - - 120K
Assembly
16 Roller Cleaner 1229 60K Dry soft cloth 240K F7-02-01
17 Separator Pad 1242 - - 60K F7-03-00
18 Feed Roller 1244 60K Alcohol 120K
19 Intermediate Roller 2306 60K Alcohol - F7-02-01
Bias Transfer Unit
20 Bias Transfer Roller 1221 60K Dry soft cloth 120K Refer to F7-02-01
(BTR) 2.2.7.
21 CDS PC Board 1986 60K Dry soft cloth -
Process Unit
- Developer - - - 120K Refer to F7-02-09
22 Cleaning Blade 704 - - 120K 2.2.4. F7-01-06
23 Cleaning Roller 706 - - 120K
24 Scoop Sheet 710 - - 120K
25 OPC Drum 716 - - 60K F7-02-05
26 Front Cleaning Felt 717 - - 120K F7-02-06
27 Rear Cleaning Felt 718 - - 120K
28 Cleaning Sponge 720 - - 120K
29 Bias Charge Roller 725 60K Dry soft cloth 120K
Fuser Unit
30 Fuser Roller Gear 1014 - - 480K Refer to F7-02-00
31 Fuser Roller 1026 60K Alcohol 240K 2.2.5.
32 Pressure Roller 1027 60K Alcohol 480K

83
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref. Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle Cycle
No. Method Procedure Counter
(Sheet) (Sheet)
33 Thermostat 1038 60K Dry soft cloth - Refer to F7-02-00
34 Bearing 1039 - - 240K 2.2.5.
35 Thermistor 1041 60K Dry soft cloth 480K
Assembly
36 Fuser Lamp (450W) 1043 - - 240K
37 Fuser Lamp (600W) 1044 - - 240K
38 Fuser Roller Bearing 1046 - - 240K
39 (Available for Japan - - - -
Only)
40 Upper Finger 1067 60K Alcohol 480K
41 Web Pressure Roller 1080 - - 480K
42 Cleaning Web Roller 1083 - - 120K F7-02-08
Dual-Path Exit Guide
43 Feed Roller 1510 60K Alcohol - Refer to F7-02-01
44 Idle Roller 1511 60K Alcohol - 2.2.5.
Automatic Duplex Unit
45 Drive Roller 1409 60K Alcohol - Refer to F7-03-06
46 Drive Roller 2 1410 60K Alcohol - 2.2.7.
Paper Transportation
47 Drive Roller 1314 60K Alcohol - Refer to F7-02-01
2.2.11.
Note:
1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
Counter - 00 (List Print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient
conditions.

84
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.5. Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter
When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show "Call for P/M" or "Replace The Toner Waste
Container" on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.

3.5.1. "Call for P/M" (Default: 120K)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.2. "Call for P/M Fuser Web" (Default: 120K)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-73 (Fuser Web PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.3. "Call for P/M ADF" (Default: Not Set)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.4. U14 "Replace The Toner Waste Container"

A. Blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators
Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and
stop operating.
A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display.
To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press any key
(up to 100 additional copies can be made).

B. Steady Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon reaching the 100 copies, the machine stops and will not allow further operation until the Toner
Waste Container is replaced.
Replace the Toner Waste Container. Refer to Section 2.2.2.

85
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.6. Lubrication Point List
This information is used for routine Preventive Maintenance (PM) calls to ensure the highest degree of
reliability. Inspect the following areas and lubricate as required. The inspection interval is usually 120K
copies or more, however the interval may be reduced due to environmental conditions.

Ref.
Mechanical Parts Grease Lubrication Point
No.
Fuser Unit
Pressure Spring 1029 EM-50L

Shoulder Screw 1033

Idle Roller 1049 EM-50L

Pinch Shaft 1068

Dual-Path Exit Guide

Top Duplex Guide 1406 EM-50L

Pinch Spring 1411

Pinch Roller 1518

86
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Ref.
Mechanical Parts Grease Lubrication Point
No.
Idle Roller Plate 1509 EM-50L
Spring

Idle Roller 1511

Roller Shaft 1313 EM-50L

Pinch Roller 1518

Paper Transportation
Drive Roller 1314 EM-50L

P6L8 Bushing 1322

Roller Shaft 1313 EM-50L

Pinch Roller 1518

87
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Ref.
Mechanical Parts Grease Lubrication Point
No.
Automatic Duplex Unit
Bias Transfer Roller 1221 EM-50L
(BTR) KS-660

Registration Pinch 1222

Roller

Front Bushing 1231

Rear Bushing 1233

Roller Shaft 1313 EM-50L

Pinch Roller 1518

Drive Roller 1409 EM-50L

P6L5 Bushing 1150

Pinch Spring 1411 EM-50L

Pinch Roller 1518

88
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.7. Updating the Firmware
The Quickest and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.
The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document
Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
3.7.1. Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC
Board, the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board and the Panel Control (PNL) PC Board.
SC PC Board Standard With PCL Option With PS Option
Configuration Configuration Configuration

On Board (A) (B) (D)

PC F-ROM (1) (2) (5)
Program Program Program
CPU 4 MB
Ethernet Port 4 MB 4 MB 4 MB

PC

USB Port Slot 1 (C) 8MB (E) 8MB

(3) (6)
Program Program
2 MB (a) (a)
FRM8 PCB 4 MB

8 MB (4) (7)
Flash Memory Font Font
Card (b) (b)
4 MB 4 MB
4 MB or 8 MB

Slot 2

FRM8 PCB

8 MB

SPC PC Board

F-ROM
Scanner Control Program
CPU
512 KB Printer Control Program

PNL PC Board

Panel Control Program (Display & Key In)

F-ROM
Bitmap Data
CPU
4 MB Font Data

B. SC PC Board Firmware
The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. Two (2) Optional Expansion 8 MB
Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, the 8 MB of SLOT 1 / SLOT 2 depends upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (A).

89
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the
SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card.
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PCL Control Program (3) and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).

C. SPC PC Board Firmware

The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner
Control and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from
the SC PCB.

D. Panel (PNL) PC Board Firmware

The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the PNL PCB. The Programs for Key Scan,
Display Control, Energy Save Control, Bitmap Data and Font Data are saved on this Board. The
Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from the SC PCB.

E. Firmware Updating Ports

Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(2) USB Port (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can
also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
To update the SC, SPC and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard
configuration or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL or PS/PCL configuration.

90
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.7.2. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx 1
\ SC_STD \ DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SPC \ SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.

91
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.

5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.

3.7.3. Updating through USB Port (Alternate method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp (DATA lamp) turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER]
button, it is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.

92
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.

Transferring
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File
Order
\ DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-SFDL2CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-SFDL2CxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-SFDL2ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-SFDL2ExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SPC \ SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
\ PNL \ SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx.bin 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note:
1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
2. Please refer to the Firmware Update Tool OI for additional details.
3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.

Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.

3.7.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
4. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
5. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.

93
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.7.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
3.7.5. Creating a Master Firmware Card
A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
2. Insert the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.

94
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
10. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

3.7.6. Erasing the Master Firmware Card

1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts "Update Program Card?". Press "NO".
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.7.7.)
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

3.7.7. Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar
to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.

95
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.7.8. Firmware Emergency Recovery
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local
Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware
Flash Card method (3 Flash Cards required).

Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first as it only requires 3 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this
order: SC, SPC and PNL).

After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool
or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.

If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit).
- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or
create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).
- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.
2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files
automatically.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port or Master Firmware Card.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
3.7.9. Firmware Version

SC : DP-SFDL2 A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is divided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E : Optional
Model Number

96
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

PNL : SFDL2 PNL A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is devided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish,German,
French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard

Panel

Model Number
SPC : SFDL2 SPC A A Vxxxxx

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

AA: Fixed
SPC

Model Number

97
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3.8. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side
When installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be
performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory.
If copy image is abnormal, specially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.
3.8.1. Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.

5 mm
Top (Lead edge)

Two lines are printed

5 mm 5 mm

Two lines are printed

3.8.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-14, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray.
8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.8.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-06 (Print Test Pattern 4).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.

98
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.8.4. 100% Read Adjustment
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.
2. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-00 (Adj 100% Side-Side Read), to adjust the Side to Side to be the
same.
7. If the image is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-)
value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-01 (Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read), to adjust the Top to End to be the
same.
9. If the image is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-)
value.
10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
Note:
This is the size adjustment and do not worry about the positioning.
3.8.5. Original Registration & CCD Read Adjustments
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.
2. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the Original Registration.
7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (P Mode Image Density), to adjust the CCD Read for the side
position.
9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.8.6. ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Adjustment
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.
2. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-93 (ADF 100% Image 1-Sided), to adjust the Side to Side to be the
same.
7. If the image is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-)
value.
8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

99
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
standby.
Note:
This is the size adjustment and do not worry about the positioning.
3.8.7. ADF Original Read Edge & ADF Main Scan Adjustments
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.
2. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust the ADF Original Read Edge.
7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Read Main Scan Pos.), to adjust the ADF Main Scan for
Side position.
9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.

3.9. Calibrating the LCD

1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.
2. Ensure that the F-ROM Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is
installed in the machine, remove it.
3. Press and hold the "ENERGY SAVER" and "FUNCTION" keys down simultaneously, then turn the
Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for
approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.
The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a "+" on the upper left edge of the display.
Note:
If you do not hold the "ENERGY SAVER" and "FUNCTION" keys down long enough, the Display
may go OFF.
4. Press the "+" on the upper left edge of the display, press the "+" on the lower right edge and press the
"+" on the center of the display. Then the display goes to stand-by.
Caution:
Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball
Point Pen, etc.
5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.

100
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START

Plug the Power Cord in and turn

the Power Switches ON.

Does the unit power up No

normally?
Does the LCD display No
Yes the function correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display

Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed

Does the unit produce No

normal copies?
Yes Does the original document No
feed through correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot the
Document Feeder

Does the recording paper No

exit the unit?
Yes Check for recording
paper path problems.
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling, Troubleshoot printed
information codes, or copy quality problems
diagnostic codes.)

101
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.2. Improper LCD Display
START

Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB)

and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).

Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?
No Yes No

Does CN52, pin 3 on the SC Yes

PCB measure +5 VDC?
No
Replace the LCD No
Replace the SC PCB. Module. Replace the
Touch Panel.
No Replace the Low
Is the trouble Is the trouble resolved?
resolved? Voltage Power Yes
Yes Supply Unit.

END

END

102
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems
4.3.1. Black Copy

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

No
Is the HVPS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the HVPS.
2. Check the contacts between
HVPS and Developer Unit.
3. Replace the HVPS.

No
Is the SPC PCB normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.

END

103
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.2. Blank Copy

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains in the Corona Unit?
No 1. Clean the Corona Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Corona Unit.

No
Is the HVPS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltage on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
1. Remove the particles from the
No laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.

No
Is the LPC3 PCB normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.

END

104
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.3. Vertical White Lines

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path? 1. Remove the particles from
No the laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

105
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.4. Ghost Images

Paper Travel
AAA
A

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes

Is the recording paper damp? Yes

No
Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

106
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.5. Vertical Dark Lines

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

107
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.6. Horizontal Dark Lines

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Is the LSU normal?

Yes Replace the LSU.

No
Is the HVPS normal?

Yes 1. Check all connectors and

voltages on the HVPS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltage on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes Clean or replace the rollers.

END

108
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.7. Dark Background

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal? Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes

Is the recording paper damp? Yes

No
Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.

No
Is the HVPS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltages on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

109
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.8. Light Print

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Yes

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
No

Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit No

operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Yes
Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path? 1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
No 2. Replace the LSU.

No
Is the HVPS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Replace the HVPS.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller No

surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

110
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.9. Horizontal White Lines

Paper Travel
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes

Is the recording paper damp? Yes

No
Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains in the Corona Unit?
No 1. Clean the Corona Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Corona Unit.

No
Is the HVPS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Replace the HVPS.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

111
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

P
START

Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the recording paper.

No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?

Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor fail (open-circuit).

112
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.11. Voids in Solid Areas

Paper Travel
START

Is the recording paper damp? Yes

No
Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

4.3.12. Black Dots

P
Paper Travel

START

Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

113
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases

Paper Travel
START

Is the recording paper damp? Yes

No
Replace the recording paper.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains in the paper path?
No Remove any obstructions and / or
clean the paper path.

Is the recording paper skewing? Yes

No Ensure the paper is set correctly in

the Paper Tray and that the Paper
Guides are properly adjusted.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Yes

Roller surfaces soiled or are
there any foreign particles or 1. Remove any foreign particles
stains in the Fuser Unit? and / or clean the stains.
No 2. Clean or replace the rollers.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.

END

114
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality
START

Is the Test Pattern printout No

in Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal? 1. Replace the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the LSU.
Yes 3. Replace the HVPS.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.

Make a local copy.

No
Is the printed copy correct?

Yes Check the connections of

CN850 on the CCD PCB,
CN 55 on the SC PCB,
the Scanning Lamp.

Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.

No
Is the received copy correct?
Yes 1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB.
2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cord.
4. Replace the FXB PCB.

Is a poor copy printed only No

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes Telephone line quality is poor.

The transmitting machine

may be defective.

END

115
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.15. Document Skewing

START

Mo de
Copy le Is the Test Pattern printout No Check the Scanner
Samp in Copier F1 Mode normal? or ADF/iADF mechanism.
Yes

Is the LSU normal? No Check or replace LSU.

Yes

END

116
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.15.1. LSU Skew Adjustment
(1) Open the Front Cover and the Right Cover.
(2) Slide the Process Unit out. (Refer to 2.2.4.)
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

(3) Remove the Front Left Cover. (Refer to 2.2.10.)

(4) Loosen 4 Red Screws.

Adjust the Lever Plate downwards and recheck the

< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge
One scale adjusts the skewed image by
approximately 0.01 mm.

A
Adjust the Lever Plate upwards and recheck the
< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge

117
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.16. Abnormal Printing
START

Is the recording paper loaded No

in the Paper Tray properly?
Yes 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.
2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.

Is the recording paper size and No

thickness within specification?
Yes Replace with correct paper.

Is the Panasonic Toner No

being used?
Yes Replace with the Panasonic Toner.

Are all switches and sensors No

operating properly?
Yes Adjust, clean or replace.

Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or paper pieces in the receiver
unit? Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
No from the receiver unit.

No
Do the rollers rotate properly?

Yes 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and

springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Is the receiving mechanism No

operating correctly?
Yes Adjust or replace any defective parts.

END

118
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems
START

Is the Scanning Lamp Yes

abnormal?
No
Replace the Scanning Lamp.

Are there any foreign particles Yes

or paper pieces in the scanning
area? Remove the foreign particles or paper
No pieces from the scanning area.

Yes
Is the scanning area dirty?
No 1. Clean the Scanning Glass.
2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.

Are the Transmitting Yes

Rollers dirty?
No Clean the rollers.

Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No 1. Check CN (SC PCB).
2. Check CN (CCD PCB).
3. Replace the CCD Assembly.
4. Replace the SC PCB.

END

119
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.3.18. Print Skew Adjustment for Platen Glass Scanning
Follow the procedures below to adjust for the skewing when scanning original(s) from the Platen Glass.

(1) Make sure that the Scanner Unit is in the

Standby Mode.
(2) Remove 3 Screws and the Left Platen Cover.

(3) Loosen the Left Screw (A).

(B)
(A)

(A)

(4) Adjust the Right Screw (B) to correct for

the skew of the leading edge of the document.
(B)
(A)

(B)

<Direction of Rotation and Skew Adjustment

Example of Printed Image Amount>
Document Leading Edge
• Counter-clockwise → When the printed image is
skewed to the right side.
• Clockwise → When the printed image is skewed to
the left side.
• Rotation and amount of movement → One rotation
of the screw, adjusts the skewed image by
Rotate Screw (B) Rotate Screw (B) approximately 1 mm.
counter-clockwise clockwise Note:
Do not rotate 2-3 turns at once to avoid other
problems.
(5) Make a copy to confirm the correction.
(6) Perform the Service Mode F6-03 to adjust the
Top field, if necessary.
(7) Tighten Screw (A) and re-install the Left Platen
Cover.

120
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.4. Document Feeder (ADF)
4.4.1. No Document Feed
START

Is the Document set No Set the Document

properly? properly.
Yes

Is the Document No Set the Document on

thickness or size
the Platen Glass.
within specifications?
Yes

Does the NP Sensor

Does the LCD activate No No Adjust or replace the
Actuator move
when a Doument is set? Actuator.
smoothly?
Yes Yes

Does CN27, pin 3 on No Check the connections

Check the Harness of
the ADF PCB of CN21 on the ADF
the ADF Motor.
measure +5 VDC? PCB and CN605
*Note 1 on the SC PCB.
Yes
Is the trouble No
resolved?
Yes

END

Does the ADF Roller No Replace the Clutch Replace the ADF
rotate? or the ADF Motor. PCB or the SC PCB.
Yes

No
Is the trouble Replace the ADF PCB.
resolved?
Yes

END

Is the Feed Roller No Check and adjust the

surface dirty? separator pressure.
Yes

Is the trouble No Replace the Pre-Feed

Clean the Feed Roller
resolved? and / or the ADF Roller.
surface.
Yes

END

121
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.4.2. Document Jam
START

Are there any obstacles in Yes Remove any obstacles

the document path? blocking the path.
No
Does the ADF Roller No Check the ADF Motor
rotate? connector.
Yes
Yes
Is the trouble resolved?
No
Replace the ADF Motor or
the ADF PCB.

Does the document feed No Check the Gear and

normally? the Roller.
Yes
Does CN27, pin 3 on the No Check the connections of
ADF PCB measure CN21 on the ADF PCB and
+5 VDC? CN605 on the SC PCB.
[In Normal Mode
(Non-Energy Saver Mode),
Document Detect Sensor
is not actuated - refer to
Note 1]
Yes
Yes
Is the trouble resolved?
No
Replace the ADF PCB or
SC PCB.

END

Note:
Since 1/10th of the power is supplied during the Energy Saver Mode,
the output signal waveform at this pin is at 1/10th of the Duty Pulse.

122
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.4.3. Document Skew
START

Are there any obstacles Yes

Remove any obstacles
in the document path?
from the document path.
No
Are the Pre-Feed and ADF No Replace the Pre-Feed
Rollers operational? and / or ADF Roller.
Yes
Are the components of the No Replace any worn out /
Feeder Unit operational? defective component.
Yes

Does the NP Sensor No Adjust or replace the

Actuator move smoothly? Actuator.
Yes
Adjust Feed Skew
Yes
Front Page skew? Adjustment "A".
(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)
No
Adjust Feed Skew
Yes
Back Page skew? Adjustment "B".
(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)
No

END

123
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.4.3.1. ADF / i-ADF Feed Skew Adjustment
Pinch Roller (1838)
(Feed Skew Adjustment "A")

Pinch Roller (1838)

(Reverse Registration or Feed Skew Adjustment "B")
1. Front Page Skew Adjustment
Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m2) weight pager), make a copy from the ADF / i-ADF to check
for feeding alignment.

Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" downwards

< Example of Printed Image > and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as
Document Leading Edge needed.

A
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" upwards and
< Example of Printed Image > recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge

124
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2. Back Page Skew Adjustment (i-ADF Only)
Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m2) weight pager), make a copy from the i-ADF to check for
feeding alignment.

Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" downwards

< Example of Printed Image > and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as
Document Leading Edge needed.

B
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" upwards and
< Example of Printed Image > recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge

B
4.4.4. ADF / i-ADF Free Stop Adjustment
Follow the procedure below to adjust the Free Stop function, if necessary.

Fasten 2 Adjusting Screws on the Right Hinge.

Screws The Adjustment should be performed by 1/4 turn
while checking the Free Stop.
Make sure that the rotation values of both Adjusting
Screws are the same.

125
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.5. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface
4.5.1. Checking Network Configuration
START

Print the current Internet Parameters List

Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation

Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet No
Parameters List that you just printed. Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit

From the DOS Prompt, enter the following

command-line utility: ipconfig /all

Does the displayed Network configuration,

match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
No
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address: Ask the Network Administrator to
Subnet Mask: verify the proper information.

Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"

Does the current routing table for the No

Gateway match ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
Does the Default Gateway respond to the No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Check the power switch, cables and the
current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the
No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"ping host name" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"telnet" command ?
Yes Replace the SC PCB

Ask the Network Administrator to verify the

POP/SMTP account and system status.

126
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.5.2. Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.

When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.

In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).

In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.

1. System Diagram Model

Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.

Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.pcc.com Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.pcc.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server Server

sv2.labo.pcc.com sv1.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.2] [192.168.1.1]

Network A
[192.168.3.0] [192.168.3.254]
[192.168.1.253]
Router (R1)

Network B PC Client
"ping" [192.168.1.0] [192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.pcc.com

Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.pcc.com Network C PC Client
[192.168.4.0] [192.168.4.1]
Panasonic Device fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.pcc.com

127
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2. Checking Current Configuration
Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.

Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:

Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)

For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP

The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:

C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com
DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1
Node Type : Hybrid
NetBIOS Scope ID :
IP Routing Enabled. : No
WINS Proxy Enabled : No
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No

Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 :

Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter

Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8

DHCP Enabled : No
IP Address : 192.168.3.4
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254
Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).

3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity

The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).

Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.

-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.

128
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
PINGing the Unit
C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com

Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254

Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com

Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:

C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com

Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:

Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.

Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

129
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send.
-w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.

C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000

Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.

The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.

This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:

a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.

To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>

Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:

1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254
2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

130
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5. Managing Network Route Tables
In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.

The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:

Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface

192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254
192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.

IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.

The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took
only a single hop.

When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.

Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables,
some are shown below:

• MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
• Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
• Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
• METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.

All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

131
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:

Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1

6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This
utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:

C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1

NS(Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com

A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1 A 192.168.1.1
sv2 A 192.168.1.2
ec5 A 192.168.1.4
ec4 A 192.168.3.4
ef1 A 192.168.3.5

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

132
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command
TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.

For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet

telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]

220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx

helo
250 Hello

mail from:test
250 Sender OK

rcpt to:[email protected]
250 Receipient OK

data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"

[Press the Enter Key]

Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
250 OK, Mail accept

quit
221 Closing transaction channel

133
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.6. Error Codes (For Copier)
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.
When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.
4.6.1. User Error Codes (U Code)
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.

User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Code Item Possible Cause(s)
U0 Key Counter 1. Card Key not installed.
2. Key Counter Harness disconnected.
3. Department Code not assigned.
U1 Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover open.
2. Front Cover Sensor disconnected.
3. Front Cover Sensor defective
4. LVPS connector disconnected.
5. LVPS defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
U4 Close Finisher 1. Finisher open.
2. Paper in the output bin.
3. Stapler empty.
4. LVPS connector disconnected.
5. LVPS defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
U6 Close Right Cover 1. Right Cover open.
2. Right Cover Sensor disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor defective.
4. LVPS connector disconnected.
5. LVPS defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
U7 Close Feed Cover 1. Feed Cover open.
2. Feeder Unit incorrectly installed.
3. Feeder Unit connector disconnected.
4. Feeder Unit Sensor disconnected.
5. Feeder Unit Sensor defective.
6. LVPS connector disconnected.
7. LVPS defective.
8. CST2/CST3 PCB connector disconnected.
9. CST2/CST3 PCB defective.
U8 Close Paper Transport Unit 1. Paper Transport Unit open.
2. Paper Transport Unit Sensor disconnected.
3. LVPS connector disconnected.
4. LVPS defective.
5. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
6. SPC PCB defective.
U11 Remove Paper in Finisher 1. Paper in the Finisher.
2. Finisher Paper Exit Sensor defective.
U12 Close Finisher Staple Cover 1. Finisher Staple Cover open.
/ Upper Cover 2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor disconnected.
3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor defective.

134
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
User Error Codes (U Code) Table
Code Item Possible Cause(s)
U13 Add Toner 1. Toner Bottle incorrectly installed.
2. Low Toner.
3. Toner Sensor disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor defective.
5. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
6. SPC PCB defective.
U14 Replace Toner Waste 1. Toner Waste Container full.
Container (See Sect. 3.5.4.)
U15 No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container not installed.
2. Toner Waste Container Sensor disconnected.
3. Toner Waste Container Sensor defective.
U16 No Developer Unit 1. Developer Unit not installed.
U18 Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter full.
U20 Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover open.
2. ADF not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor defective.
5. LVPS connector disconnected.
6. LVPS defective.
U21 Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover open.
2. ADF Sensor disconnected.
3. ADF Sensor defective.
U22 Close ADF Exit Cover 1. ADF Exit Cover open.
2. ADF not installed correctly.
3. ADF Exit Cover Sensor disconnected.
4. ADF Exit Cover Sensor defective.
5. LVPS connector disconnected.
6. LVPS defective.
U25 Shake Toner Bottle 1. Toner blocked in the Toner Bottle.
U90 Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.

135
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.6.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)

B
C
A

D2

D3

D4

Section Jam Location

A Finisher
B Paper Transport Area
C Paper entry area
D2 2nd Paper Feed Unit
D3 3rd Paper Feed Unit
D4 4th Paper Feed Unit
E ADF/i-ADF

• J Code Log View Mode

The 5 most recent J Codes can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "Function" and "3" keys in
Standby mode.

Note:
If the machine is jammed, follow the procedure below.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF position. (If Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, refer to 3.7.7.)
2. Remove the Jammed paper.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
4. Press the "Function" and "3" keys.

136
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
• Jam Sensor Location of Printer
Automatic Duplex
Unit Sensor 1

Paper Transport Automatic Duplex

Unit Sensor 4 Unit Sensor 2
Paper Transport Dual-Path
Unit Sensor 3 Exit Sensor
Paper Transport Automatic Duplex
Unit Sensor 2 Unit Sensor 3
Exit Sensor
Paper Transport
Unit Sensor 1 Fuser Unit
Paper Exit Sensor

Automatic Duplex
Unit Sensor 4
Registration
Sensor

1st Paper Tray Sheet Bypass

2nd Registration
Sensor
Sheet Bypass
NP Sensor
2nd Paper Tray

3rd Registration
Sensor

3rd Paper Tray

4th Registration
Sensor

4th Paper Tray

137
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
• Jam Sensor Location of Finisher
Finisher Exit
Sensor
Finisher Registration
Sensor
Stapler

• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

Original Detection Sensor

Read Point
Sensor

Eject Sensor

Duplex Eject
Sensor

• Jam Sensor Location of ADF

Original Detection Sensor

Read Point
Sensor

Eject Sensor

138
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Code Contents Section
J00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C
paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)
J01 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C
Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)
J02 The 2nd Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D2
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)
J03 The 3rd Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D3
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Feeder Unit)
J04 The 4th Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D4
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Feeder Unit)
J07 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C, D2
paper starts feeding from 2nd Feeder Unit. (2/3/4 Feeder Unit)
J08 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the D3
Paper Feed Roller started rotating on the 3rd Feeder Unit. (3/4 Feeder Unit)
J09 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the D4
Paper Feed Roller started rotating on the 4th Feeder Unit. (4th Feeder Unit)
J12 The 2nd Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the C, D2
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J13 The 3rd Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the D3
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J14 The 4th Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the D4
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J19 The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the C
Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 4 is activated.
J22 The 2nd Registration Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. C, D2
J23 The 3rd Registration Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. D2, D3
J24 The 4th Registration Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. D3, D4
J30 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C
is activated. (Sheet Bypass)
J31 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C
is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass)
J32 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C
is activated. (i-ADF)
J33 The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C
J40 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time C
after the Registration Sensor is activated.
J41 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after C
the Sensor is activated.
J42 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C
J43 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser C
Unit Paper Exit Sensor is activated.
J44 The Paper Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time. C
J45 The Paper Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during non- C
printing mode.
J46 The Dual-Path Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the C
Sensor is activated.
J47 The Dual-Path Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during C
non-printing mode.

139
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table
Code Contents Section
J48 The Dual-Path Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after C
the Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor is activated.
J51 The Paper Transport Unit Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined B, C
time after eject paper Sensor of dual-path exit guide unit is activated.
J53 The Paper Transport Unit Sensor 4 does not detect paper within a predetermined B, C
time after eject paper Sensor of dual-path exit guide unit is activated.
J56 The Paper Transport Unit Sensor 2 does not go off within a predetermined time. B, C
J58 The Paper Transport Unit Sensor 4 does not go off within a predetermined time. B, C
J59 The Paper Transport Unit Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. B
J60 The Finisher Registration Sensor is not detects paper within a predetermined time A
after the Paper Transport Unit Sensor is activated.
J61 The stapler is not activated correctly. A
J62 The Finisher Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after A
the Sensor is activated.
J63 The Finisher Registration Sensor detects paper at the time of the initials. A
J64 The Finisher Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the A
Fuser Registration Sensor is activated.
J65 The Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time. A
J66 The Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper at the time of the initials. A
J70 Read Point Sensor does not go ON within 4 seconds after the original starts feeding. E
(Information Code 030 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)
J71 Original was longer than 78.7 in (2m). E
(Information Code 031 or 032 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)
J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined B
time.
J82 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 4 does not detect paper within a predetermined C
time after Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 1 is activated.
J83 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 1 does not go off within a predetermined time after C
the Sensor is activated.
J85 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 4 does not go off within a predetermined time after C
the Sensor is activated.
J87 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 1 detects paper during non-printing mode. C
J88 The Automatic Duplex Unit Sensor 2, 3 or 4 detects paper during non-printing mode. C
J91 A Paper Tray is pulled out when feeding a paper. C
J97 The Paper is not fed out after a predetermined time has lapsed. C
J98 The VRDY Signal is not ON after a predetermined time has lapsed. C
J99 No VSYNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated. C

140
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.6.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

E1: Optical Unit Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass 1. Home Position Sensor connector disconnected.
Scanning 2. Home Position Sensor defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism defective.
6. SDR PCB connector disconnected.
7. SDR PCB defective.
8. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
9. SPC PCB defective.
10. LVPS defective.
E1- 20 Laser Unit Horizontal 1. LSU connector disconnected.
Synchronization 2. LSU defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
E1- 22 Polygon Motor Synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector disconnected.
2. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
3. LSU connector disconnected.
4. Polygon Motor defective.
5. LVPS defective.
6. SPC PCB defective.
E1- 31 Scanning Lamp 1. INV PCB connector disconnected.
(does not turn On) 2. INV PCB defective.
3. Scanning Lamp defective.
4. LFB PCB connector disconnected.
5. SDR PCB connector disconnected.
6. SDR PCB defective.
7. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
8. LVPS defective.
E1- 34 Scanning Lamp Harness 1. INV PCB connector disconnected.
2. LFB PCB connector disconnected.
3. Scanning Lamp connector disconnected.
E1- 40 Book Fan Motor Rotation 1. Book Fan connector disconnected.
2. Book Fan defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.
E1- 45 LSU Fan Motor Rotation 1. LSU Fan connector disconnected.
2. LSU Fan defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.
E1-50 Size Sensor Adjustment 1. Size Sensor defective.
2. Size Sensor connector disconnected.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. ADF/Platen Cover open and Recording Paper not set
on the Scanning Glass.

141
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

E2: Lift DC Motor Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E2- 01 Lift Motor Rotation 1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.
(1st Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor defective.
3. Lift Mechanism defective.
4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.
5. Lift Motor defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
8. LVPS defective.
E2- 02 Lift Motor Rotation 1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.
(2nd Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor defective.
3. Lift Mechanism defective.
4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.
5. Lift Motor defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
8. CST2 PCB connector disconnected.
9. CST2 PCB defective.
10. LVPS defective.
E2- 03 Lift Motor Rotation 1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.
(3rd Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor defective.
E2- 04 Lift Motor Rotation 3. Lift Mechanism defective.
(4th Paper Tray) 4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.
5. Lift Motor defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
8. CST2 PCB connector disconnected.
9. CST2 PCB defective.
10. CST3 PCB connector disconnected.
11. CST3 PCB defective.
12. LVPS defective.
E2- 08 Sheet Bypass Initialization 1. Sensor connector disconnected.
2. Sensor defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.
E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor 1. Drive Mechanism defective.
Rotation 2. Drive Motor connector disconnected.
3. Drive Motor defective.
4. CST2 PCB connector disconnected.
5. CST3 PCB connector disconnected.
6. CST3 PCB defective.
7. LVPS connector disconnected.
8. LVPS defective.
9. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
10. SPC PCB defective.

142
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

E3: Development System Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E3- 01 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation 1. Toner Bottle Motor connector disconnected.
2. Toner Bottle Motor defective.
3. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism defective.
4. Toner Bottle installed incorrectly.
5. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
6. SPC PCB defective.
7. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector
disconnected.
8. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor defective.
E3- 03 Toner Density Sensor Gain 1. Sensor connector disconnected.
2. Sensor defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
E3- 20 Main Motor Rotation 1. Drive Mechanism defective.
2. Main Motor connector disconnected.
3. Main Motor defective.
4. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
5. SPC PCB defective.
6. LVPS defective.
E3- 40 Copy Density Sensor Output 1. CDS PCB connector disconnected.
Adjustment 2. CDS PCB defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.

E4: Fuser Unit Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Thermistor dirty.
2. Thermistor position incorrect.
3. Thermistor defective.
4. Thermistor connector disconnected.
5. Fuser Lamp connector disconnected.
6. Fuser Lamp defective.
7. Fuser Thermostat defective.
8. Thermal Fuse defective.
9. ACD PCB connector disconnected.
10. ACD PCB defective.
11. NFL PCB connector disconnected.
12. NFL PCB defective.
13. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
14. SPC PCB defective.
15. Fuser temperature low. (Adjust F6-31)
E4- 02 Fuser Paper Jam 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 disconnected.
3. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 defective.
4. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
5. SPC PCB defective.

143
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
E4: Fuser Unit Error
Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E4- 10 Fuser Fan Motor Rotation 1. Fuser Fan connector disconnected.
2. Fuser Fan defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.

E5: System Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E5- 05 Vp (+24V, Scanner) 1. SDR PCB connector disconnected.
2. SDR PCB defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.
E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication 1. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
Abnormal 2. SPC PCB defective.
E5- 12 Scanner Engine 3. SC PCB connector disconnected.
Communication Abnormal 4. SC PCB defective.
E5- 17 Scanner Synchronization
E5- 19 Scanner Line Synchronization
E5- 42 Total Counter Connection 1. Total Counter connector disconnected.
2. Total Counter defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1. Cooling Fan connector disconnected.
Motor Rotation 2. Cooling Fan defective.
3. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
4. SPC PCB defective.
5. LVPS defective.

E7: Optional Unit Error (DA-FS300)

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E7- 22 Finisher Damper Motor 1. Motor Connector disconnected.
2. Motor defective.
3. Home Position Sensor Connector disconnected.
4. Home Position Sensor defective.
5. Gear defective.
E7- 23 Finisher Staple Motor 1. Motor Connector disconnected.
2. Motor defective.
3. Home Position Sensor Connector disconnected.
4. Home Position Sensor defective.
5. Micro Switch Harness disconnected.
6. Micro Switch defective.
7. Solenoid Harness disconnected.
8. Solenoid defective.
9. Gear defective.
10. Motor wedged with a jammed Staple.

144
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
E7: Optional Unit Error (DA-FS300)
Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E7- 27 Finisher Tray Shift Motor 1. Motor Connector disconnected.
2. Motor defective.
3. Paper Height Sensor Connector disconnected.
4. Paper Height Sensor defective.
5. Gear defective.
E7- 59 Finisher Upper Limit 1. Paper Upper Limit Sensor Connector disconnected.
2. Paper Upper Limit Sensor defective.
3. Paper Hold Sensor Connector disconnected.
4. Paper Hold Sensor defective.
E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Hardware Key is incorrect.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate
Optional Unit Service Manual.

E13: Out of Toner

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E13 No Toner Detection 1. Out of Toner.
2. Toner Bottle not installed.
3. Toner Bottle not installed correctly.
4. Toner Sensor disconnected.
5. Toner Sensor defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.

Technician Warning:

The following message will be displayed in the event that the required Additional Sort Memory to operate
the HDD is not installed.

LCD Message Possible Cause(s)

HDD Option Requires 1. Additional Sort memory is not installed.
Additional Sort Memory • DA-SM16 (16 MB)
Minimum 16 MB • DA-SM64 (64 MB)
• DA-SM28 (128 MB)
2. Make sure the SDRM PC Board was installed properly.

145
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.7. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

Fax Information Codes

Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
012 RCV C, D The length of the received
document is over 2 m.
030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not Document not set properly.
activate within 4 seconds after the Defective Read Point Sensor.
document starts feeding.
031 XMT C Transmitting document was longer Document may be jammed.
COPY than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor.
(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4
in), 600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in))
061 - A ADF Door is open. Cover not firmly closed.
Connectors not firmly connected.
200 RCV C Decoding process is not Defective FXB PCB.
completed at the end of phase C.
212 XMT A-E Interface error occurred between Modem defective. (FXB PCB)
RCV the CPU and modem. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
301 XMT System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
RCV
331 XMT C 8-minutes timer error.
(Germany only)
400 XMT B T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed Wrong number dialed and the START
without detecting 300 bps signal. button is pushed.
Telephone line disconnected while
dialing.
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB
defective.
Receiver defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password (Password Reception,
Selective Receive).
Mailbox full.
402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
403 RCV B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) not
(Polling) function. set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted not placed
at the transmitter.
404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
followed by TCF three times, but etc.)
the receiver did not respond. (CFR FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first
NSS (or DCS) transmitted.

146
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Fax Information Codes
Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality poor. (TCF is damaged due
transmitted TCF at 2400 bps. to line noise)
Received RTN after Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
communicating at 2400 bps. etc.)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
406 RCV B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match.
(Password Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Comm.) RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone
number.
407 XMT D Transmitter received no response Receiver defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN. excessive errors. (Line quality poor)
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB
defective.
408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with errors.
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. (Line quality poor)
Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
etc.)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact.
Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
etc.)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter defective.
etc.)
411 RCV B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter not ready for polling
(Polling) NSC. communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After FXB PCB defective.
transmitting FTT)
414 RCV B No response received after Password does not match between
(Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
415 XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling
polling communication. transmission feature.
416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality poor. (RTC signal distorted
EOM, etc. due to line noise)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality poor. (There are excessive
response to post message. errors in received data)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.

147
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Fax Information Codes
Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality poor. (There are excessive
response to PRI-Q from errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
requests voice contact)
420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without Wrong number dialed.
detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication)
Transmitter defective.
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
421 RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal. Wrong number dialed.
422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC Incompatible content
(or DTC) was invalid.
427 G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS Interface is incompatible.
RCV transmitted.
433 XMT B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station.
RCV
434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter defective or incompatible.
FTT. Line quality poor.
456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
457 RELAY XMT B Remote unit does not have
CONF. XMT/ Relayed XMT or Confidential
POLL Comm. capability.
459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality poor. (Training signal
distorted due to line noise)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
of 64 lines.
494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter defective.
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality poor. (EOL damaged due to
received message data. line noise)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
495 XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line disconnected.
RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
current.
496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB defective.
ON.
501 XMT/ B Incompatible Modem on the
RCV(V.34) Remote unit.
502 XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line disconnected.
RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
current.

148
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Fax Information Codes
Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
503 XMT/ B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB defective.
RCV(V.34) ON during training. Line disconnected.
504 RCV/V.34 B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original set.
(Polling) station.
505 XMT/V.34 B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original set.
(Polling)
540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface.
CTC or DCN received.
541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Faulty line.
EOR or received DCN. MJR PCB abnormal.
542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit abnormal.
transmitted or received DCN.
543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit abnormal.
MCF.
544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Faulty line.
Transmission. MJR PCB abnormal.
550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station.
has elapsed.
554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Faulty line.
EOR.
555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Faulty line and Operator Call requested
EOR. by RX side.
570 RCV B Password or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function.
155) OFF.
581 XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the
in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
630 XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
(Polling) is not detected. (Country dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (Country
dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed
without a signal from the receiver.
631 XMT A "STOP" key was pressed during
Auto Dialing.

149
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Fax Information Codes
Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
634 XMT PSTN Redial count over with no
response or busy tone was not
detected.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
638 XMT PSTN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off.
LAN data in memory or during Power failure occurred.
communication.
712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
714 XMT LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable not
RCV Cannot logon to the LAN. connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address set.
No email application activated on the
Mail Server.
717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.
transmission. Mail Server defective.
718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the paper
tray(s).
719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a
format that is not supported. supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
720 POP LAN Unable to connect to the POP Incorrect POP Server address set.
Server. POP Server is down.
721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password set.
722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network DHCP not available.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
725 XMT LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address set.
POP DNS Server is down.
726 XMT LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address set.
POP the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address set.
729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)

150
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Fax Information Codes
Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer via set to Valid.
Email from a PC.
731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was (70 stations) is being used.
received.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
800 Relay PSTN The machine was requested to
Comm. relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
814 Conf. XMT PSTN The remote station does not have
Conf. Polling Relay XMT nor Confidential
Relay Communication capability.
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox full.
816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did
not match.
825 Conf. RCV PSTN Parameter settings of the remote
Conf. Polled station are not properly set.
870 MEM XMT PSTN Memory overflow occurred while
Multi-Copy LAN storing documents into memory.
879 Memory PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
RCV substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow. Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
880 - - File Access Error.
884 - - File Access Error.
961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.
962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.
LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.

151
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.8. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.

Journal Example

************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********

NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC

01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000

1st digit 13th digit

- PANASONIC MACHINE

****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Manufacturer
Code
0 -
1 Casio
2 Canon
3 Sanyo
4 Sharp
5 Tamura
6 Toshiba
7 NEC
8 Oki
9 Hitachi
A Xerox
B Fujitsu
C Matsushita
D Mitsubishi
E Murata
F Ricoh

152
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button
0 - - - -
1 Received - - -
2 - Received - -
3 Received Received - -
4 - - Received -
5 Received - Received -
6 - Received Received -
7 Received Received Received -
8 - - - Pressed
9 Received - - Pressed
A - Received - Pressed
B Received Received - Pressed
C - - Received Pressed
D Received - Received Pressed
E - Received Received Pressed
F Received Received Received Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data
Resolution (dpi) Paper Width
0 - A4
1 S-Fine A4
2 400 x 400 A4
3 300 x 300 A4
4 - B4
5 S-Fine B4
6 400 x 400 B4
7 300 x 300 B4
8 600 x 600 A4
9 600 x 600 B4
A - -
B 600 x 600 A3
C - A3
D S-Fine A3
E 400 x 400 A3
F 300 x 300 A3

153
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data
Scanning Rate Resolution
0 20 ms/line Std
1 5 ms/line Std
2 10 ms/line Std
3 - Std
4 40 ms/line Std
5 - Std
6 - Std
7 0 ms/line Std
8 20 ms/line Fine
9 5 ms/line Fine
A 10 ms/line Fine
B - Fine
C 40 ms/line Fine
D - Fine
E - Fine
F 0 ms/line Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Memory/
Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
0 - Manual Non-Memory
Communication
1 Used Manual Non-Memory
Communication
2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory
3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory
4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory
5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory
6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory
7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory
8 - Manual Memory
Communication
9 Used Manual Memory
Communication
A - Auto Dialing Memory
B Used Auto Dialing Memory
C - Auto RCV Memory
D Used Auto RCV Memory
E - Remote RCV Memory
F Used Remote RCV Memory

154
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Password
Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm.
Comm.
0 - RCV Off Off
1 Yes RCV Off Off
2 - XMT Off Off
3 Yes XMT Off Off
4 - RCV On Off
5 Yes RCV On Off
6 - XMT On Off
7 Yes XMT On Off
8 - RCV Off On
9 Yes RCV Off On
A - XMT Off On
B Yes XMT Off On
C - RCV On On
D Yes RCV On On
E - XMT On On
F Yes XMT On On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Sub-Address Confidential Turnaround
Relayed Comm.
Comm. Comm. Polling
0 - - - -
1 Yes - - -
2 - Yes - -
3 Yes Yes - -
4 - - Yes -
5 Yes - Yes -
6 - Yes Yes -
7 Yes Yes Yes -
8 - - - Yes
9 Yes - - Yes
A - Yes - Yes
B Yes Yes - Yes
C - - Yes Yes
D Yes - Yes Yes
E - Yes Yes Yes
F Yes Yes Yes Yes

155
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Advanced Cover Sheet
Comm. XMT
0 - -
1 Report XMT -
2 Check & Call -
3 - -
4 Memory Transfer -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - Yes
9 Report XMT Yes
A Check & Call Yes
B - Yes
C Memory Transfer Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Standard/ Non-
Short Protocol
Standard
0 - Standard
1 - Standard
2 - Standard
3 - Standard
4 - Standard
5 - Standard
6 - Standard
7 - Standard
8 - Non-Standard
9 B Non-Standard
A - Non-Standard
B D Non-Standard
C - Non-Standard
D B Non-Standard
E - Non-Standard
F D Non-Standard

156
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data
Coding ECM
0 MH -
1 MR -
2 MMR -
3 JBIG -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 MH Yes
9 MR Yes
A MMR Yes
B JBIG Yes
C - Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Symbol Rate
V.34
(V.34)
0 - -
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 2400 sr Yes
9 - Yes
A 2800 sr Yes
B 3000 sr Yes
C 3200 sr Yes
D 3429 sr Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes

157
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Modem Speed
Modem Speed
(V.34)
0 2400 bps -
1 4800 bps 2400 bps
2 7200 bps 4800 bps
3 9600 bps 7200 bps
4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps
5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps
6 12000 bps 14400 bps
7 14400 bps 16800 bps
8 - 19200 bps
9 - 21600 bps
A - 24000 bps
B - 26400 bps
C - 28800 bps
D - 31200 bps
E - 33600 bps
F - -
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

158
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.9. Troubleshooting (For Printer)
4.9.1. Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.

If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:

• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
• Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
• Ensure that the Unit is turned On
• Ensure that the Paper is set properly on the Unit
• No error message is displayed on the Unit
• Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box

4.9.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem Solutions
Character is not printing in the • Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
correct positions or the driver to coincide with the application.
characters near the edges of the • Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
page are missing. • Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of ¼ inches (4 mm) on all sides.
The font type is wrong. • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.
• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select “Always use TrueType fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth. • Select a outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be • Select 600 dpi resolution.
obtained.
Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.
Different character or symbol • Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
from the document is printed.
The printer does not print • Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an
anything or prints irregular Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
images from the middle of the Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
1st page.
Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings “Start printing after first page is spooled”
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select 300 dpi resolution.

159
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
4.9.3. Error Message Appears on the PC
Error Message Solutions
Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On" and the 10Base-T/
100Base-TX cable is properly connected.
• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someone’s print job,
please wait and try again later.
• The Panafax facsimile unit is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is • Verify and specify the paper size or orientation to coincide with the
found in the current printer application and the printer driver settings.
setting.

4.9.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message Solutions
Cannot complete print job • The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be
Image memory overflow enough.
Either install an optional Sort Memory or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Can not complete • The print condition may not be matched for the system.
Confirm print condition Change the printing condition in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
i.e. Multi-sized printing with stapling order.
Cannot print • Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties
System error dialog box.

4.9.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Solutions

Can not read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.

160
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service Mode

The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys on
the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.

2. To exit the Service Mode

The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions

Service Modes (For Copier)

Service
Item Function
Mode
F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.
01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD
and LEDs.
02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page
Memory.
03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper
position alignment.
04 Print Test Pattern 2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the
Paper position alignment.
05 Print Test Pattern 3 Prints the Grid pattern for setting the
Paper position alignment.
06 Print Test Pattern 4 Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex
Paper position alignment.
F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key
is pressed.
F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start
key is pressed.
F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items
(selected item numbers) is checked.
F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be changed.
F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be adjusted.
F7 Electronic Counters Electronic Counters for Maintenance
F8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item
(selected by code numbers)
F9 Unit Maintenance Fax Function Parameters

161
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

F5-00 Country version USA/CAN F5-50 Auto contrast adjust. Yes

F5-01 Frequency desired 60Hz F5-51 Dept. Counter (COPY) No
F5-02 . . . . . F5-52 Dept. Counter (FAX) No
F5-03 LSU startup speed Full F5-53 2-sided auto shift No
F5-04 LSU off timer 15 Sec. F5-54 Margin reduction No
F5-05 . . . . . F5-55 Margin value default 10mm
F5-06 . . . . . F5-56 Edge value default 5mm
F5-07 Language default English F5-57 Book value default 20mm
F5-08 . . . . . F5-58 U14 Clear Any Keys
F5-09 Fuser lamp control off F5-59 Ope.add toner alarm Stop

F5-10 . . . . . F5-60 Auto Tray selection Yes

F5-11 . . . . . F5-61 . . . . .
F5-12 Printer fan extension 5 min F5-62 . . . . .
F5-13 . . . . . F5-63 U13 clear Any keys
F5-14 Paper size tray1(cop.) LETTER F5-64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) Yes
F5-15 Paper size tray2(cop.) LEDGER F5-65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) Yes
F5-16 Paper size tray3(sys1) LEDGER F5-66 Interleaving default Blank
F5-17 Paper size tray4(sys2) LEDGER F5-67 Page insertion default Blank
F5-18 . . . . . F5-68 Cover mode default F,Blank
F5-19 . . . . . F5-69 Reduce N in 1 space No

F5-20 ADF Auto F5-70 PM cycle 120k

F5-21 Finisher Auto F5-71 . . . . .
F5-22 System console Auto F5-72 Disable at web PM Stop

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02

F6-00 Adj 100% Side-Side Read 0 F6-50 T/P Mode Image Density 0
F6-01 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read 0 F6-51 P Mode Image Density 0
F6-02 100% Selection 0 F6-52 . . . . .
F6-03 Original Registration 0 F6-53 CCD Read Position Adj 0
F6-04 Printer Registration 0 F6-54 T Mode Contrast 0
F6-05 Main Motor Speed 0 F6-55 T/P Mode Contrast 0
F6-06 Polygon Motor Speed 0 F6-56 P Mode Contrast 0
F6-07 Registration Void 6 F6-57 Charge Roller Frequency 0
F6-08 Trail Edge Read Timing 0 F6-58 Charge Roller Current 0
F6-09 Trail Edge Print Timing -6 F6-59 . . . . .

F6-10 Side Adjust (Bypass) 0 F6-60 . . . . .

F6-11 Side Adjust (Tray 1) 0 F6-61 . . . . .
F6-12 Side Adjust (Tray 2) 0 F6-62 TDC Gain Voltage Adjust 0
F6-13 Side Adjust (Tray 3) 0 F6-63 Lead Edge Read Timing 0
F6-14 Side Adjust (Tray 4) 0 F6-64 Side Edge Read Adjust 0
F6-15 . . . . . F6-65 Black Density Reference 0
F6-16 Side Adjust (ADU) 0 F6-66 Black Density Output 0
F6-17 Charge Roller Voltage 0 F6-67 ADF Image Density 0
F6-18 Standard Laser Power 0 F6-68 Paper Loop (Tray 3) 0
F6-19 Std Bias DC Voltage 0 F6-69 Stamp Position Adjust 0

F6-20 Print Contrast Adjust 0 F6-70 . . . . .

F6-21 TDC Gain Voltage 0 F6-71 . . . . .
F6-22 . . . . . F6-72 . . . . .

162
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME : DP-3010
MAC ADDRESS : 080023006FA1
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : AAT001xxPU
SC BOOT : M13
PNL : SFDL2_PNL:T03115
SPC : 30cpm T00148
FINISHER : Ver 6D01
FAX MODEM :
PDL FONT1 :
SC2 :

3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY : 32 MB
SORT MEMORY : 16 MB
FAX MEMRY : 2 MB

4.OPTION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (iADF) : Yes
2nd PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
3rd PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
4th PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT : Yes
DUPLEX UNIT (ADU) : Yes
DUAL-PATH EXIT GUIDE : Yes
FINISHER : FS300
FAX BOARD : Yes
NETWORK SCANNER : No
PCL PRINTER : No
PS PRINTER : No
EMAIL : Yes
HDD : No

5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27 XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41 XX-00000140
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-PANASONIC -

****** DP-2310 ******************* -SFD-L2 - ***** - 0001- *********

Remarks:
XX-00000140

Page Count

00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error

163
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

F7-01 Key Operator ID Code : 0000

F7-02 Maintenance Count

Total Count : 295
PM Count : 295
Scanner PM Count : 61
ADF Count : 26

OPC Drum Count : 295

Process Unit Count : 295
ADF PM Count : 50
Fuser Web Count : 295
Developer Count : 295
Corona Cleaning Count : 295
Avg Print/Drum Rise Up : 0
Total OPC Rotation Time : 0
Avg Min/Drum Rise Up : 0

F7-03 Paper Feed Count

Sheet Bypass Count : 147
1st Paper Tray Count : 90
2nd Paper Tray Count : 0
3rd Paper Tray Count : 0
4th Paper Tray Count : 0
LCT Tray Count
2-Sided Count : 28
A4/LETTER Count : 284
A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 73
A3/LEDGER Count : 19
B4/LEGAL Count : 0

F7-04 Scanner Count

ADF Count : 26
ADF Read Count : 26
Scanner Count : 61
Scanner Read Count : 18

164
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.3. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test

Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key.
↓
Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

1. Input Check

F4 Mode (Input Check)

Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
000 Power Supply Fan Signal Normal. 0
001 LSU Fan Signal Normal. 0
002 Toner Remaining Sensor Toner is detected. 0
Signal
003 Paper Feed Module Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(2nd Paper Feed Module)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is not 0
Sensor connected.
(2nd Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is not 0
Sensor connected.
(1st Paper Tray)
Key / Card Counter Counter is not detected. 1
Detection Sensor
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Paper Length Sensor Sensor is activated. 0
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor 2 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass, Inside)
Size Sensor 1 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass, Outside)

165
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
004 Fuser Unit Paper Exit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor
Dual-Path Exit Guide Unit Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
ADU Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 0
JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(2nd Paper Feed Module)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(1st Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 0
(2nd Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 0
(1st Paper Tray)
005 Total Counter Detection Counter is not detected. 1
Sensor
Polygon Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
Main Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
Fuser Fan Lock Signal Normal. 0
Toner Waste Container Toner Waste Container 0
Detection Sensor is detected.
Toner Waste Container Full Toner Waste Container 1
Detection Sensor is full.
Toner Bottle Motor Lock 0
Rotation Detection Sensor
006 Dual-Path Exit Guide Unit Paper is detected. 0
Exit Sensor
Paper Transport Unit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor 1
ADU Sensor 1 Paper is detected. 0
Inner Lower Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(2nd Paper Tray)
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0

166
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
007 Paper Transport Unit Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
Paper Transport Unit Door Door is open. 0
Sensor
Paper Transport Unit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor 4
Paper Transport Unit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor 3
Paper Transport Unit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor 2
ADU Sensor 4 Paper is detected. 0
ADU Sensor 3 Paper is detected. 0
ADU Sensor 2 Paper is detected. 0
008 Bottom Sensor Home position is 1
(Sheet Bypass) detected.
Front / Right Cover Open See Remarks. * Front / Right Cover is
Sensor 2 close.
Signal 1 = 0
Signal 2 = 0
Front / Right Cover Open See Remarks. * Right Cover is open.
Sensor 1 Signal 1 = 1
Signal 2 = 1

Developer Unit Detecting Unit is connected. 1

Sensor
009 JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(4th Paper Feed Module)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is not 0
Sensor connected.
(4th Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(4th Paper Tray)
Paper Feed Module Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(4th Paper Feed Module)
Feed Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Feed Module See Remarks. * Unit is connected.
Detection Sensor 2 Signal 1 = 1
(3rd Paper Feed Module) Signal 2 = 0
A different signal
Paper Feed Module See Remarks. * pattern, indicates that
Detection Sensor 1 the unit is not
(3rd Paper Feed Module) connected, or CST 3
PCB is defective.

167
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
010 Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is 1
Sensor connected.
(3rd Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(3rd Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(4th Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 0
(4th Paper Tray)
011 Book Fan Lock Signal Normal. 0
013 Paper Entrance Sensor Paper is detected. 1 1-Bin Finisher
Paper Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 1 (FS300).
Home Position Sensor Home position is 1
detected.
Paper Hold Lever is 0 0
outside.
Paper level is 0 1
Paper Level Sensor base line.
Paper Hold Sensor Paper Hold Lever is 1 0
inside.
Paper level is 1 1
upper limit.
Paper Upper Limit Sensor Paper Upper Limit is 1
detected.
Paper Tray Full Sensor Paper Full is detected. 1
Front Stapler Home Home position is 1
Position Sensor detected.
014 Stapler Cartridge Sensor Stapler Cartridge is 1
detected.
Staple Sensor Staple is empty. 0
Stapler Unit Sensor Stapler Unit is detected. 1
Stapler Cover Switch Cover is open. 0
Top Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0
Joint Detect Sensor Finisher Unit is not 0
detected.

168
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
020 Size Sensor C Original detected on the 1 Z

C position.
Y Platen
Size Sensor B Original detected on the 1
B position. X
C B A
Size Sensor A Original detected on the 1
Front Side
A position.
Size Sensor Z Original detected on the 1
Z position.
Size Sensor Y Original detected on the 1
Y position.
Size Sensor X Original detected on the 1
X position.
021 Home Position Sensor Home position is 1
detected.
ADF/Platen Cover Open ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open.
ADF/Platen Cover Angle ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open more than 30°
angle.
Fuser Lamp Disconnect No Lighting 1
Detection Sensor
+24V Line Error Detecting +24V Line is ON. 1
Signal
022- Not Used
029
030 ADF B1 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF B2 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Paper Exit Detection Original is detected. 1
Sensor
ADF Inverting Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Detection Sensor 1 See Remarks. * iADF
Signal 1 = 1
Signal 2 = 1
ADF
Signal 1 = 1
ADF Detection Sensor 2 See Remarks. * Signal 2 = 0
A different signal
pattern, indicates that
the unit is not
connected.

169
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
031 ADF Original Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Length Original is detected. 1
Sensor 2
ADF Original Length Original is detected. 1
Sensor 1
032- Not Used
039

170
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2. Output Check
Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.

F4 Mode (Output Check)

No. Item Function Remark
040 Total Counter When SPC PCB CN715-8 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
count up the Total Counter.
041 Key Counter / Card Counter When SPC PCB CN726-2 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
count up the Key Counter.
When SPC PCB CN726-6 signal
level changes to 0V from +5V, count
up the Card Counter.
042- Not Used
049
050 Main Motor When SPC PCB CN723-2 signal
level changes to 0V from +5V, the
Main Motor activates.
051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In When SPC PCB CN720-16 signal
Forward Direction level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Motor rotates in the forward
direction.
052 Toner Supply Clutch When SPC PCB CN720-18 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Clutch activates.
053 LSU Fan / Power Supply Fan / When SPC PCB CN704-10 is 24V,
Book Fan LSU Fan rotation is high-speed.
When SPC PCB CN704-9 is 24V,
Power Supply Fan rotation is
high-speed.
When SPC PCB CN709-16 is 24V,
Book Fan rotation is high-speed.
054 Density Sensor Solenoid When SPC PCB CN714-6 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Solenoid activates.
055 Not Used
056 Fuser Fan When SPC PCB CN709-13 is 24V,
Fuser Fan rotates.
057 Not Used
058 Fuser Web Solenoid When SPC PCB CN721-12 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Solenoid activates.
059- Not Used
060
061 Registration Clutch When SPC PCB CN715-2 signal 1 minute
level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
062 Not Used
063 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When SPC PCB CN715-4 signal 1 minute
(1st Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.

171
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Output Check)
No. Item Function Remark
064 Lift Motor When SPC PCB CN706-2 signal
(1st Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
065 OPC Clutch When SPC PCB CN728-2 signal 1 minute
level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
066- Not Used
069
070 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-2 signal 1 minute
(2nd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
071 Lift Motor When CST2 PCB CN774-2 signal
(2nd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
072 Intermediate Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-4 signal 1 minute
(2nd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
073- Not Used
074
075 Paper Feed Motor When CST3 PCB CN805-4 signal
(3rd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +5V,
activate the Motor.
076 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CST3 PCB CN806-2 signal 1 minute
(3rd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
077 Lift Motor When CST3 PCB CN804-2 signal
(3rd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
078 Intermediate Roller Clutch When CST3 PCB CN806-4 signal 1 minute
(3rd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
079 Not Used
080 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-2 signal 1 minute
(4th Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
081 Lift Motor When CST2 PCB CN774-2 signal
(4th Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
082 Intermediate Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-4 signal 1 minute
(4th Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
083- Not Used
084
085 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When SPC PCB CN715-6 signal 1 minute
(Sheet Bypass) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
086 Not Used

172
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Output Check)
No. Item Function Remark
087 ADU Intermediate Roller Clutch When SPC PCB CN711-2 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Clutch operates.
088- Not Used
099
100 Inner Upper Paper Exit Solenoid When SPC PCB CN719-3 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
clutch turns OFF.
101 Inner Lower Paper Exit Solenoid When SPC PCB CN719-1 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
clutch turns.
102 Paper Transport Unit Motor Paper transport unit motor rotates in
(Exit to Outer Tray) the forward direction.
103 Paper Transport Unit Motor Paper transport unit motor rotates in
(Exit to ADU) the reverse direction.
104 Paper Guide Solenoid ON When EXFD PCB CN792-1 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch turns ON for Straight Paper
Exit.
105 Paper Guide Solenoid OFF When EXFD PCB CN792-3 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch turns OFF for Inverting Paper
Exit.
106- Not Used
109
110 Paper Feed Motor Feed Motor rotates. 1-Bin Finisher (FS300).
Paper Alignment Motor Paper Alignment Motor drives the
Alignment Plate.
Paper Tray Lift Motor Paper Tray Lift Motor drives the
Paper Tray up and down.
Stapler Motor Stapler Motor rotates 2 sec. cycle.
Paddle Solenoid Solenoid turns ON/OFF 500 msec.
cycle.
Large Gear Solenoid Solenoid turns ON/OFF 500 msec.
cycle.
Paper Hold Lever Solenoid Solenoid turns ON/OFF 1 sec. cycle.
111- Not Used
119
120 Lamp When SDR PCB CN656-1 signal
level changes to 0V from +5V, Lamp
operates.
121- Not Used
159
160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating ADF paper feed motor rotates at
(35% speed rotating) 35% speed.
161 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating ADF paper feed motor rotates at
(100% speed rotating) 100% speed.
162 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating ADF paper feed motor rotates at
(400% speed rotating) 400% speed.

173
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F4 Mode (Output Check)
No. Item Function Remark
163 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse ADF paper feed motor rotates in
Rotating reverse at 35% speed.
(35% speed rotating)
164 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse ADF paper feed motor rotates in
Rotating reverse at 100% speed.
(100% speed rotating)
165 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse ADF paper feed motor rotates in
Rotating reverse at 400% speed.
(400% speed rotating)
166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 1 When ADF PCB CN22-10 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates for 3 seconds.
167 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 2 When ADF PCB CN22-8 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
operates for 3 seconds.
168 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 3 When ADF PCB CN24-2 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
operates for 3 seconds.
169 ADF Paper Exit Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-2 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 3 second.
170- Not Used
171
172 ADF Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-5 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 1 second.
173 ADF Inverting Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-3 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 1 second.
174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-7 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 1 second.
175 ADF Stamp Solenoid When ADF PCB CN25-2 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 1 second.

174
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.4. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
00 Country Version 0 : Japan Country Dependent
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
01 Frequency Desired 0 : Auto 2 (for USA / Canada)
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz 1 (for Europe)
02 Not Used
03 LSU Startup Speed 0 : Low 1
1 : Full
04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec. 3
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
05- Not Used
06

175
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
07 Language Default English English
French
German
Swedish
Italian
Dutch
Portugal
Spanish
Norway
Danish
Finnish
English
Polish
Hungary
Japanese
Czech
Russian
Greek
Chinese
Taiwan
Korean
08 Not Used
09 Fuser Lamp Control 0 : Off 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : Auto 1 (for Europe)
10-11 Not Used
12 Printer Fan Extension 5 : 5 min 5
2 : 2 min
0 : Non
13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : Off 1
1 : On
14 Paper Size Tray 1 0 : None 11 (for USA / Canada)
1 : A3
2 : B4 1 (for Europe)
3 : A4
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
6 : B5-R
7 : A5
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER-R
15 : INVOICE
15 Paper Size Tray 2 Same as F5-14
16 Paper Size Tray 3 Same as F5-14
17 Paper Size Tray 4 Same as F5-14
18- Not Used
19

176
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
20 ADF 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
21 Finisher 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
22 System Console 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
23 Paper Transport Unit 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
24 Not Used
25 Digital QUANTUM 0 : Off 1
1 : On
26 2-Sided Unit 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
27- Not Used
29
30 Dual-Path Guide Unit 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
31 ADF Duplex Scanning 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
32 Job Build And SADF Mode 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
33 Not Used
34 Multi Size Feed Default 0 : Off 0
1 : On
35 Output Tray (Inner 2) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
36 Display DD key 0 : No 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : Yes 1 (for Europe)
37 Output Tray (Outer) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
38 2-Sided Mode Default 0 : No 0
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
39 Not Used
40 Double Count 0 : No 1 (for USA / Canada)
1 : LDR 3 (for Europe)
2 : LDR, LGL
3 : A3
4 : A3, B4
41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed 1
1 : At exit
42 KEY/DEPT Counter 0 : No 0
1 : Key Cntr
2 : DEPT.
3 : Card
43 Key Counter Timing Same as F5-41 0
44 Insert Paper Count 0 : No 0
1 : Yes

177
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
45 Dept Code Reentry Again 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
46- Not Used
47
48 TH Sensor (DEV) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
49 Not Used
50 Auto Contrast Adjust 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
53 2-Sided Auto Shift 0 : No 0
1 : Auto sft
54 Margin Reduction 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
55 Margin Value Default 0 : 5 mm 1
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
56 Edge Value Default 0 : 5 mm 0
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
57 Book Value Default 0 : 15 mm 1
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
58 U14 Clear 0 : Continue 1
1 : Any Keys
59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop 0
1 : Continue
60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
61 Not Used
62 Overflow Detection 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
63 U13 Clear 0 : Any keys 0
1 : Func + 1
64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
66 Interleaving Default 0 : Blank 0
1 : Copy
67 Page Insertion Default 0 : Blank 0
1 : Copy

178
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
68 Cover Mode Default 0 : F, Blank 0
1 : F, Copy
2 : FB, Blank
3 : FB, Copy
69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
70 PM Cycle 0 : No 12
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K
14 : 200 K
15 : 240 K
71 Not Used
72 Disable At Web PM 0 : Continue 1
1 : Stop
73 PM Cycle (Fuser Web) 0 : 120 K 0
1 : 240 K
74 Fuser Web Advance 0 : Short 1
1 : Standard
2 : Long
75- Not Used
77
78 A4/LTR Size Select 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
79 Not Used
80 Paper Size Priority 1 : A3 13 (for USA / Canada)
2 : B4 3 (for Europe)
3 : A4
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
6 : B5-R
7 : A5
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER-R
15 : INVOICE

179
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
81 B4/FLS Size Selection 0 : B4 0
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
82 Manual Skyshot Mode 0 : Off 0
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : No 1
1 : Normal
2 : Quality
84 Paper Tray Priority 0:S>C>B 1
1:C>S>B
85 Side Void Setting (ADF) 0 : None 0
1 : Yes
86 PM Cycle (Optics) 0 : No 0
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No 0
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
88 USB Port Function 0 : Off 0
1 : Once
2 : ON
89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 0
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
90 TCH Panel Beep Sound 0 : Off 1
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
91 M1, Size Set the default size for Manual Skyshot 70 x 160
92 M2, Size Mode, M1 and M2. 95 x 220
93- Not Used
94
95 Paper Size (FA) 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : USA/CAN 2 (for Europe)
2 : Europe
3 : Other

180
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
96 Bypass Detection 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : USA/CAN 2 (for Europe)
2 : Europe
3 : Other
97 Bp tray B4/FLS/LGL (FA) 0 : B4 3 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : 8 x 13 0 (for Europe)
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL

181
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.5. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "6" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

Note:
The Factory Setting is different in each model.

F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
00 Adj 100% Side-Side Read Adjustment of ratio for vertical position when -9 - +9 0.1%
scan is made.
01 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read Adjustment of ratio for parallel position when -9 - +9 0.1%
scan is made.
02 100% selection Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9% -9 - +9 0.1%
03 Original Registration Adjustment of platen original registration -30 - +30
detection timing. 0.2mm
04 Printer Registration Delay time is adjusted from registration roller -50 - +50
clutch ON. 0.5mm
05 Main Motor Speed Adjustment of Main Motor speed. -10 - +10
0.1%
06 Polygon Motor Speed Adjustment Polygon Motor speed. -5 - +5 0.1%
07 Registration Void Registration void should be adjusted. 0 - +99
0.5mm
08 Trail Edge Read Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - 0
0.5mm
09 Trail Edge Print Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - +15
0.5mm
10 Side Adjust (Bypass) Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). -8 - +7
0.5mm
11 Side Adjust (Tray 1) Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
12 Side Adjust (Tray 2) Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
13 Side Adjust (Tray 3) Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
14 Side Adjust (Tray 4) Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm

182
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
15 Not Used
16 Side Adjust (ADU) Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU). -8 - +7
0.5mm
17 Charge Roller Voltage Charge voltage compensation adjustment. -76 - +76
2.60V
18 Standard Laser Power Laser power compensation adjustment. -29 - +25
19 Std Bias DC Voltage Adjustment of bias standard voltage. -77 - 76
3.92V
20 Not Used
21 TDC Gain Voltage Adjustment of toner density sensor gain -86 - +40
voltage. 0.033V
22-24 Not Used
25 Bias Duty Ratio Bias duty ratio adjustment -5 - +5
(Factory use only) 0.80%
26 TDC Judgment Level Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement -26 - +26
voltage level. 19.5mV
27 Bias Frequency AC Bias frequency adjustment -5 - +3
(Factory use only)
28 QUANTUM White Density Adjustment of standard white density level. -99 - +99
29 QUANTUM Black Density Adjustment of standard black density level. -99 - +99
30 Light Halftone Adj. Halftone duty ratio adjustment -127 - +127
31 Fuser Temperature Adjustment of fuser temperature. -15 - +15
0.833°C
32 Fuser Edge Temperature Temperature compensation for edges -15 - +15
0.833°C
33 TDC Max. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99
(Read only)
34 TDC Min. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99
(Read only)
35 TDC Avg. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99
(Read only)
36 Paper Loop (Tray 1) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1 -99 - +99
37 Not Used
38 ID Standard Voltage Adjustment of judgement standard voltage. -35 - +35
39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. -32 - +32
40 Transfer Current Side 1 Adjustment of Transfer Current. -16 - +15
0.6uA
41 Paper Loop (Bypass) Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass -99 - +99
42 Paper Loop (Tray 2) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 2 -99 - +99
43 Paper Loop (2-Sided) Adjustment for the length of the loop formed -99 - +99
before the copier timing roller.
44 FAX Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for FAX. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
45 Not Used
46 PRINTER Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for Printer. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.

183
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
47 Transfer Current Side 2 Adjustment of Transfer Current. -16 - +15
0.6uA
48 Not Used
49 T Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Text mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
50 T/P Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo -99 - +99
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
51 P Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Photo mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
52 Not Used
53 CCD Read Position Adj Adjustment of CCD read position. -42 - +44
0.2mm
54 T Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode. -128 - +127
55 T/P Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode. -128 - +127
56 P Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode. -128 - +127
57 Charge Roller Frequency Adjustment of Charge Roller Frequency. -56 - +25
58 Charge Roller Current Adjustment of Charge Roller Current. -58 - 0
5uA
59 Trail Edge Trans Trays Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for Trays 1-4 feeding. 0.5mm
60 Trail Edge Trans Bypass Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for Bypass Tray feeding. 0.5mm
61 Trail Edge Trans 2Sided Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for the 2nd side of 2-Sided 0.5mm
printing.
62 TDC Gain Voltage Adjust Adjustment of Toner Density sensor gain -10 - +10
voltage. 0.033V
63 Lead Edge Read Timing Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point. 0 - +9
0.5mm
64 Side Edge Read Adjust Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point. 0 - +9
0.5mm
65 Black Density Reference Reference voltage for Black Density sensor. -127 - +127
66 Black Density Output Compensate value for Black Density sensor -127 - +127
output.
67 ADF Image Density Compensation of ADF image density. -99 - +99
68 Paper Loop (Tray 3) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 3 -99 - +99
69 Stamp Position Adjust Adjustment of verification stamp position. -50 - +50
0.3mm
70-77 Not Used
78 Paper Loop (Tray 4) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 4 -99 - +99
79 MTF Adjust Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital -2 - +2
image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.
80 QUANTUM Photo Mode Read Value of QUANTUM Gamma Table for Photo +1 - +5
Mode. (Read Only)

184
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
81 QUANTUM Halftone Read Value of QUANTUM Laser duty of Check +127 - +255
pattern. (Read Only)
82 QUANTUM Black Read Value of QUANTUM Laser duty of Black +127 - +255
pattern. (Read Only)
83 Temperature Sensor Value Value of Temperature sensor. 0 - 255
(Read Only)
84 Humidity Sensor Value Value of Humidity sensor. 0 - 255
(Read Only)
85 Not Used
86 ADF Reverse Stop Posi. Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position. -99 - +99
0.3mm
87 ADF Exhaust Stop Posi. Adjustment of ADF exit stop position -99 - +99
0.3mm
88-89 Not Used
90 ADF Read Main Scan Pos. Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read -99 - +99
start position. 0.05mm
91 Original Read Edge ADF Adjustment of original detection timing. -99 - +99
0.3mm
92 Original Trail Edge ADF Adjustment of trail edge detection timing. -127 - 127
0.3mm
93 ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
94 ADF 100% Image 2-Sided Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
95 Manual Photo Adj. Adjustment of Gamma Table Value for Photo +1 - +5
Mode (QUANTUM OFF)
96 Manual Halftone Adj. Adjustment of Laser duty of Check pattern for +127 - +255
Text and Text/Photo Mode. (QUANTUM OFF)
97 Manual Black Adj. Adjustment of Laser duty of Black pattern for +127 - +255
Text and Text/Photo Mode. (QUANTUM OFF)
98 Not Used
99 F5/F6 Initialization Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.

185
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.6. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "7" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F7 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F7 Electronic 00 List Print
Counters 01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for
access to the counter mode.
02 Maintenance 00 Total Count Total count for all copies / prints.
Count 01 PM Count Preventive Maintenance count.
02 Scanner PM Count PM count for scanner readings.
03 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the
ADF.
04 Not Used
05 OPC Drum Count PM count of recording paper fed
through the OPC Drum.
06 Process Unit Count PM count of recording paper fed
through the Process Unit.
07 ADF PM Count PM count of originals fed through the
ADF.
08 Fuser Web Count PM Count for Fuser Web.
09 Developer Count PM Count for Developer.
10 Not Used
11 Avg Print/Drum Rise Average Print Count for OPC Drum.
Up
12 Total OPC Rotation Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Time
13 Avg Min / Drum Rise Average Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Up

186
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F7 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F7 Electronic 03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet
Counters Count bypass.
01 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st
paper tray.
02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd
paper tray.
03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd
paper tray.
04 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th
paper tray.
05 Not Used
06 2-sided Count Total count of 2-sided Print.
07 A4 / LETTER Count Total count of A4 / Letter Print.
08 A4R / LETTER R Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
Count
09 A3 / LEDGER Count Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.
10 B4 / LEGAL Count Total count of B4 / Legal Print.
04 Scanner 00 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the
Count ADF.
01 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through
the ADF.
02 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations.
03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.
05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count Total count of copies printed.
01 Copy Scan Count Total count of copies scanned.
06 PC Count 00 PC Print Count Total count printed from PC.
01 PC Scan Count Total count scanned to PC.
07 Fax Count 00 Fax Transmit Count Total count of Fax transmitted.
01 Fax Receive Count Total count of Fax received.
02 Fax Print Count Total count of Fax printed.
08 All Counter Clear All counters are cleared.

187
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.7. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "8" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
00 Exp. Lamp replacement When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to
the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the CLEAR key.*
01-05 Not Used
06 Error Log Print/View a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine
errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are
displayed, beginning with the oldest code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
08 (Factory use only) Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
09 Toner Density adjustment Adjustment operation of Toner Density.
10 Drum Charge adjustment Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.
11 Not Used
12 Org.size Sensor Adj. Adjust the slice level for the original size detection
sensors automatically. Execute this mode by closing
the platen cover.
13 Black Density reference Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.
14 Black Density gain Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor gain.
15 QUANTUM Pattern Print out the QUANTUM Test Pattern.
16-17 Not Used
18 LSU PWM Pattern Print out the Test Pattern.
Proceed when the LSU is replaced.

188
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
19 Move Mirror To Lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
20 TDC Check Operation Adjustment of TDC sensor.
21-46 Not Used
47 ADF Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
48 Platen Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
49-54 Not Used

189
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.1.8. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 00 Fax Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a
machine malfunction occurs.
02 Firmware 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.
Version 01 SC boot Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.
03 SPC Displays the firmware version for SPC.
04 Finisher Displays the firmware version for
finisher.
05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX
option 1.
06 Not Used
07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
03 Print 00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5
Device Info. and F6 modes.
01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
02 System Address Prints the system memory setting.
Info.
03 RAM Address Prints the RAM data dump list.
Information
04 RAM Edit 00 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.
Mode 01 Real Address Setting of Real address.
05 Not Used

190
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 06 RAM 00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function
Maintenance Initialize parameters to default values.
01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
02 Not Used
03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.
05 Dept. Counter Clear
07 Firmware 00 Update from F-ROM Updates the firmware in the machine
Update Master Card with the Master Firmware Card.
01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine
with the USB.
08 Program 00 Main Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Backup 01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
(Refer to 02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Sect. 3.7.)
03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
04 Option 2 all Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
05 Option 2 a Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
06 Option 2 b Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
09 Update Program Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB
Flash Memory Card will be required
depending upon the model.
10 Program 00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.
Copy 01 From card to slot 2
02 From slot 1 to card
03 From slot 1 to slot 2
04 From slot 2 to card
05 From slot 2 to slot 1
11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.
12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.
13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).
14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).

191
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)
5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service Mode

The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys on
the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.

Press "9" and "START" keys to enter F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance.

Select "00 FAX Service Mode" on the Touch Panel display to enter Facsimile Service Mode.

2. To exit the Service Mode

The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.2.2. FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.

No. Service Mode Description

00 Not Used
01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.
03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
05 Not Used
06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
07 Not Used
08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.

192
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.

Select the "01 Function Param. Setting" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Function Parameter Table

No. Parameter Selections Function
000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = Tel/Dial automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
001 Alarm Status 1 = Off Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer OFF : Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
002 Stop Comm. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
003 Continuous Poll 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to store
or add the documents into a polled file. (See
Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "STOP".
004 Numeric ID Set 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.

193
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
005 Destination 000 : Austria Sets the Destination Code after installing the Fax
Code 001 : U.K. Communication Board (DA-FG300).
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark Note:
004 : Taiwan It is not necessary to set the parameter for the
005 : Finland following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware
006 : Germany is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.
007 : Netherlands PB : UK
008 : Italy PF : France
009 : Spanish
PG : Switzerland
010 : Hong Kong
PK : China
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland PM : Germany
013 : Norway PT : Taiwan
015 : Portuguese PU : USA
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
006 ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
007 JRNL Column 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = RCV’D ID Journal.
008 Monitor 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
009 DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook) communication test.
010 TX Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
011 RX Level 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm

194
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
012 DTMF Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
015 Not Used
~
016
017 TX Start 1 = 2400 bps Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/
2 = 4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
3 = 7200 bps Note:
4 = 9600 bps This parameter is applicable only when
5 = TC7200 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
6 = TC9600 communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
7 = 12000 bps use Parameter No. 32.
8 = 14400 bps
018 RX Start 1 = 2400 bps Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
2 = 4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
3 = 7200 bps Note:
4 = 9600 bps This parameter is applicable only when
5 = TC7200 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
6 = TC9600 communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
7 = 12000 bps use Parameter No. 33.
8 = 14400 bps
019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.
2 = On Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
3 = Select when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers
or Manual Number Dialing.
020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid) Select the ECM mode.
2 = On (Valid)
021 EP Tone 1 = Off (without EP Tone) Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29
2 = On (with EP Tone) mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
022 Signal Interval1 = 100 ms Selects the time interval between the receiving
2 = 200 ms signal and the transmitting signal.
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short) Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
2 = Long
024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
2 = Second and Polling).
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

195
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
026 Non-Standard 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
2 = On (Valid)
027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode.
2 = On (Valid)
028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
029 Remote 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
Diagnostics 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station.
030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the
2 = 1 sec 300 bps signal.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
033 V34 RX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
034 V34 TX SR 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
035 V34 RX SR 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/
3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
036 Not Used
037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during
2 = On (displayed) communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
038 Not Used
039 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
~ key.
100 = 1000 ms
040 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
(PSTN) ~ key.
100 = 1000 ms (For Germany, Austria and Czech)
041 Pause Time 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~ dialing through a switchboard or for international
10 = 10 sec. calls.
042 Not Used
043 Redial Interval 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
~ minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
044 Redial Count 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~ intervals.
15 = 15 times Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
045 Ring Detect 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1
Count ~ ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings

196
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
046 On-Hook Time 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
047 Response Wait 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after
Interval ~ completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.

20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048 Not Used
~
049
050 Ring Detect 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line
Mode 2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
051 Not Used
052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
2 = 20 pps
053 Not Used
~
054
055 Busy Tone 1 = Off Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
Check 2 = On
056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing
(Except for USA 2 = On the telephone number.
and Canada)
057 DC Loop Check 1 = Off Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
(Except for USA 2 = On communication.
and Canada)
058 Comm. JRNL + 1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
Image 2 = On (with image) Journal with image.
059 Confidential 1 = Off (does not print out) Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
RCV Report 2 = On (prints out) RCV Report.
060 Version Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 1 = Fax Transmit Count Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and
2 = Fax Receive Count copied document count.
3 = Total Count
4 = Copy Print Count
062 Print Counter 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063 Not Used
~
067

197
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
068 NYSE Fax 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the
Forward 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(USA and Note:
Canada Only) Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding
via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled,
an Access Code of "0000" is automatically
assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new
setting added called "NYSE".
069 NYSE Local 1 = Inc Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
Print 2 = On (Always) after FAX Forwarding.
(USA and INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
Canada Only) ON : Always prints.
070 Line Error 1 = 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
2 = 256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
3 = 512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
4 = 1024 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
5 = 2048 lines PIN.
6 = Off (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES")
(will not disconnect line) (See Note 1)
071 Total Error 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10% PIN.
3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20% (See Note 2)
072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or
2 = 3 lines/STD 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error
3 = 6 lines/STD exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN.
4 = 12 lines/STD (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
073 Error Detect 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
2 = Rate
074 RTN Receive 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received.
075 Coding 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
4 = JBIG
076 Batch TX 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
(USA and 2 = On
Canada Only)
077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received document
2=2m that can be printed.
078 Not Used
~
079
080 Original Lead -99 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
Edge ADF ~ ON position and the scanning start position.
+99
081 Original Tail -127 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
Edge ADF ~ OFF position and the scanning end position.
+127
082 JAM Length 1=1m Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m be scanned.

198
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
083 Not Used
084 Line As No 1 = Ring (ring) Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the
Paper 2 = Busy (keep line busy) remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
085 Not Used
086 Reduction Fine 1 = Off Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine,
2 = On when sending with reduction B4→A4.
087 Darker Level 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level.
088 Normal Level ~ 0← →15
089 Lighter Level 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest
090 Not Used
~
091
092 Smoothing 1 = Off Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
2 = On
093 Not Used
~
101
102 Original -30 Adjustment of original registration detection timing.
Registration ~
+30
103 Trail Edge Read -9 Adjustment of trail edge void.
Timing ~
0
104 Not Used
~
109
110 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address.
111 Not Used
112 Insert EMAIL 1 = Off Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
TXT 2 = On is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
113 Not Used
~
114
115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll Selects the setting method for Time Zone.
2 = Direct Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through
the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly,
(*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.
116 Overwrite 1 = Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
Warning 2 = No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.

199
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Function Parameter Table
No. Parameter Selections Function
117 Not Used
~
121
122 LDAP 1 = Off When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be
2 = On displayed as different characters.
123 Not Used
~
174
175 FAX/EMAIL 0 = Address Book Selects the FAX/EMAIL Default.
Default 1 = Mode Set
176 Not Used
~
199

Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.

To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station".
The last Program Key will be assigned with the "Store 4 Poll" Key name automatically
and cannot be changed.

To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen
and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.

(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will
not be accepted.)

Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Setting
Signal
1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:Off
MCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 Always
RTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -
RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Setting
Signal
1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%
MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9
RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19
RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations. Print the
Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.

200
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1. Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "01 Function Parameter List" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

201
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

000 Monitor/Tel Dial Monitor 050 Ring Detect Mode Normal

001 Alarm Status Timer 051 ----------
002 Stop Comm. JRNL On 052 Pulse Rate 10pps
003 Continuous Polling Off 053 ----------
004 Numeric ID Set On 054 ----------
005 Destination Code 999 055 Busy Tone Check On
006 ID Display Chara 056 ----------
007 JRNL Column Station 057 ----------
008 Monitor Off 058 Comm. JRNL + Image On
009 DC Loop Off 059 Confidencial RCV Report On

010 TX Level -9dBm 060 Version DP-3010 AAV11502AU

011 RX Level -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 000080/000168/000003/000000
012 DTMF Level -5dBm 062 Print Counter Off
013 G3 RX EQL 0dB 063 ----------
014 G3 TX EQL 0dB 064 ----------
015 --------- 065 ----------
016 --------- 066 ----------
017 TX Start 14400bps 067 ----------
018 RX Start 14400bps 068 NYSE Fax Forward Off
019 ITU-T V.34 On 069 NYSE Local Print inc

020 ITU-T ECM On 070 Line Error 128

021 EP Tone Off 071 Total Error 10
022 Signal Interval 500ms 072 Continuous Error Off
023 TCF Check Normal 073 Error Detect Rate
024 CED Frequency 2100Hz 074 RTN Receive Discon
025 Comm. Start-Up First 075 Coding JBIG
026 Non-Standard On 076 Batch TX On
027 Short Protocol B On 077 RX JAM Length 2 m
028 Short Protocol D On 078 ----------
029 Remote Diagnostics On 079 ----------

030 CED & 300bps 75ms 080 Original Lead Edge ADF 0
031 RTC = EQL x 12 Off 081 Original Tail Edge ADF 0
032 V34 TX Start 33600bps 082 JAM Length 2 m
033 V34 RX Start 33600bps 083 ----------
034 V34 TX SR 3429sr 084 Line As No-Paper Ring
035 V34 RX SR 3429sr 085 ----------
036 --------- 086 Reduction Fine On
037 Protocol Display Off 087 Darker Level 2
038 --------- 088 Normal Level 8
039 Flash Time 500ms 089 Lighter Level 4

040 --------- 090 ----------

041 Pause Time 3sec 091 ----------
042 --------- 092 Smoothing On
043 Redial Interval 3min 093 ----------
044 Redial Count 5 094 ----------
045 Ring Detect Count 2 095 ----------
046 On-Hook Time 5sec 096 ----------
047 Response Wait Interval 55sec 097 ----------
048 --------- 098 ----------
049 --------- 099 ----------

-PANASONIC -

***** DP-3010 ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********

202
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02

100 ---------- 150 ----------

101 ---------- 151 ----------
102 Original Registration 0 152 ----------
103 Trail Edge Read Timing 0 153 ----------
104 ---------- 154 ----------
105 ---------- 155 ----------
106 ---------- 156 ----------
107 ---------- 157 ----------
108 ---------- 158 ----------
109 ---------- 159 ----------

110 MAC Address 080023000177 160 ----------

111 ---------- 161 ----------
112 Insert EMAIL TXT Off 162 ----------
113 ---------- 163 ----------
114 ---------- 164 ----------
115 Time Zone Direct 165 ----------
116 Overwrite Warning Yes 166 ----------
117 ---------- 167 ----------
118 ---------- 168 ----------
119 ---------- 169 ----------

120 ---------- 170 ----------

121 ---------- 171 ----------
122 LDAP On 172 ----------
123 ---------- 173 ----------
124 ---------- 174 ----------
125 ---------- 175 FAX/EMAIL Default ADR.BOOK
126 ---------- 176 ----------
127 ---------- 177 ----------
128 ---------- 178 ----------
129 ---------- 179 ----------

130 ---------- 180 ----------

131 ---------- 181 ----------
132 ---------- 182 ----------
133 ---------- 183 ----------
134 ---------- 184 ----------
135 ---------- 185 ----------
136 ---------- 186 ----------
137 ---------- 187 ----------
138 ---------- 188 ----------
139 ---------- 189 ----------

140 ---------- 190 ----------

141 ---------- 191 ----------
142 ---------- 192 ----------
143 ---------- 193 ----------
144 ---------- 194 ----------
145 ---------- 195 ----------
146 ---------- 196 ----------
147 ---------- 197 ----------
148 ---------- 198 ----------
149 ---------- 199 ----------

-PANASONIC -

***** DP-3010 ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.
2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

203
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4.2. Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory (IC120 and IC121 on the SC PCB) and printer
mechanism using the following procedure.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "03 Page Memory Test" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

SC : AAT00032PU(AU) TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666

SC BOOT : L2 MEMORY SIZE : (2 MB)
PNL : AAT00008PU MAC ADDRESS : 08002300E078
SPC : 23cpm S10015 SHIPMENT SET
FINISHER : 4000
FAX MODEM : Ver 6D01
PDL FONT1 :
SC2 :
-PANASONIC -

***** DP-3010 ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

204
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4.3. Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "04 Printer Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016

CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456

FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : DP-3010 AAV12900AU
PNL : AAV20100
SPC : 30cpm V20100

TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398
COPY COUNTER : 000083
PRINT COUNTER : 000016

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT | NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 |
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
***** DP-3010 *******************-PANAFAX -*******-12345678901234567890-**************

205
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4.4. All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "05 All Document Files" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

206
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4.5. Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "06 Protocol Trace" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******

STATUS : OK
MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD)
SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L
REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44

COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR
LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP
------------------------------------------------------------------
REMOTE : MCF
LOCAL : DCN
-PANASONIC -

****************************-PANASONIC DP-3010-*************-12345678901234567890-***************

207
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.4.6. Toner Order Form
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "07 Toner Order Form" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

208
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address

=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Bottle: (6) Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU15E-PU (For DP-2310/3010)

209
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)
5.2.5.1. Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.

Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "01 Binary Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE".
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Binary Signal Table

Number Signals
1 V21 300bps
2 V27ter 2400bps
3 V27ter 4800bps
4 V29 7200bps
5 V29 9600bps
6 V17 TC7200bps
7 V17 TC9600bps
8 V33 12000bps
9 V33 14400bps

210
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.5.2. Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.

Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "02 Tonal Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE".
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals
1 462 Hz
2 1080 Hz
3 1100 Hz
4 1300 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz

211
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.5.3. DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

• DTMF Single Tone

Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "03 DTM Single Tone" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and press the "START" key.
↓
Press the "STOP" key and touch the "CLOSE".
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

• DTMF Dual Tone

Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "04 DTMF Dual Tone" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Press the "STOP" key and touch the "CLOSE".
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table

Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones
1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz
2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz
3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz
4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz
5 1209 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz
6 1336 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz
7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz
8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz
8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz
9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz
* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz
# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz

212
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)

Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "05 V34 MODEM" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE".
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals
01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
02 V34 2400 sr 4800 bps 23 V34 3000 sr 12000 bps 44 V34 3429 sr 7200 bps
03 V34 2400 sr 7200 bps 24 V34 3000 sr 14400 bps 45 V34 3429 sr 9600 bps
04 V34 2400 sr 9600 bps 25 V34 3000 sr 16800 bps 46 V34 3429 sr 12000 bps
05 V34 2400 sr 12000 bps 26 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps 47 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
06 V34 2400 sr 14400 bps 27 V34 3000 sr 21600 bps 48 V34 3429 sr 16800 bps
07 V34 2400 sr 16800 bps 28 V34 3000 sr 24000 bps 49 V34 3429 sr 19200 bps
08 V34 2400 sr 19200 bps 29 V34 3000 sr 26400 bps 50 V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
09 V34 2400 sr 21600 bps 30 V34 3000 sr 28800 bps 51 V34 3429 sr 24000 bps
10 V34 2800 sr 4800 bps 31 V34 3200 sr 4800 bps 52 V34 3429 sr 26400 bps
11 V34 2800 sr 7200 bps 32 V34 3200 sr 7200 bps 53 V34 3429 sr 28800 bps
12 V34 2800 sr 9600 bps 33 V34 3200 sr 9600 bps 54 V34 3429 sr 31200 bps
13 V34 2800 sr 12000 bps 34 V34 3200 sr 12000 bps 55 V34 3429 sr 33600 bps
14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam
15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM
16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM
17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB
18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA
19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT
20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps

213
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.

Select the "06 RAM initialize" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" key to initialize RAM.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description
01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
02 JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents.
03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys.
05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.
07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

214
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)
5.2.7.1. Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-
registered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.

Select the "08 Check & Call" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"
Mode key and input the email address.)
↓
Touch the "OK" button.
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

5.2.7.2. Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted
1. Manual print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic transmission/printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
c. Toner Order Form
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre-
registered order information.
d. Call Counter Report
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).

215
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Error Tx
Log Remarks
Code Report
Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.3.)
E13 Out of Toner.
Jxx Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.2.)
Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.1.)
U13 M Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report

216
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

****************************
> SERVICE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : DP-3010 AAV12600PU
PNL : AAV10200PU
SPC : 30cpm V11600
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT
F7-02 Total Count : 13 240000 2-Sided Count : 0
PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3
Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10
ADF Count : 1 ------ A3/LEDGER Count : 0
OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ B4/LEGAL Count : 0
Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1
Fuser Web Count : 240986 ADF Read Count : 1
Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9
Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00
Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4

F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 0

1st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 6
2nd Paper Tray Count : 10
3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 0
4th Paper Tray Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0
FAX Print Count : 0

(4) PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** DP-3010 *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

Explanation of Contents

(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)

217
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:00 ********

****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)

FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

SC : DP-3010 AAV12600PU
PNL : AAV10200PU
SPC : 30cpm V11600

TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 (4)

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082
COPY COUNTER : 000000
PRINT COUNTER : 000000

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”

(2) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(3) Firmware Version
(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters

218
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.7.5. Toner Order Form

*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address

=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Bottle: (6) Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU15E-PU (For DP-2310/3010)

219
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

*****************************************************************
> SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE <
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : DP-3010 AAV12600PU
PNL : AAV10200PU
SPC : 30cpm V11600
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT
PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3
Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10
ADF Count : 1 ------ A3/LEDGER Count : 0
OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ B4/LEGAL Count : 0
Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1
Fuser Web Count : 240986 ADF Read Count : 1
Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9
Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00
Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4

F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 0

1st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 6
2nd Paper Tray Count : 10
3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 0
4th Paper Tray Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0
FAX Print Count : 0

(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value : 14000

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** DP-3010 *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

Explanation of Contents

(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value

220
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1. Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.

Select the "09 System Maintenance" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "01 Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
↓
Select the desired Fax number.
↓
Press "START" to send the Fax.
After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.

Note:
If the File is NOT in the machine, it is not functioned.
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description
01 Send RCV'D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.

221
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

6 System Description
6.1. Printing Process
Exit
Fusing

Cleaning

Discharge
Lamp (LED) ADU

OPC
Charger Drum Separation (GND)
(-DC) Transfer (+DC)
Photo Electric
Laser Exposure
Conversion

Toner Developer

Magnetic
Roller

Paper Feed

Primary Charge: Image Exposure: Developing:

Illumination
Charge Roller
Latent Charge Image
Drum Image
Toner
Aluminum Latent Doctor Blade
Layer Gap = 0.6~ Magnetic
Charge Roller
0.7 mm
Drum Surface Image
Bias: -550 V
Approximately-750V DC

Transfer / Separation Fusing: Cleaning:

Discharge
Plate
Fuser Lamp Cleaning
Blade
Bias
Pressure
Transfer
Roller
Roller
OPC
Transfer Drum
Charge Heat Roller Paper
(+DC)
Paper
Latent Image

Discharge Lamp:
Discharge
Lamp (LED)

OPC
Drum

222
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.2. Precaution with Consumables
(1) Photoreceptor (OPC) Drum
- Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare hands.
- Be careful not to smear the surface with saliva, water, oil, etc.
- Do not store in places where the temperature is high.
- Do not store it in strong light (such as direct sunlight or on the window).
- Do not expose it to chemical gas or vapor.
- Do not store the drum unit with the photoreceptor drum installed without covering
it with clean paper.

(2) Toner / Developer

1) Do not mix different types of toner and developer.
- The machines are designed to use exclusive toner and developer for specific
models. Be careful not to use toner and developer from other models.
2) Do not mix foreign materials.
Be careful not to contaminate toner and developer with foreign materials. If
you spill toner or developer on a table or floor when adding toner or developer
in the developer unit, discard what was spilled. Such supplies may damage the
drum as well as cause other image problems.
3) Do not place into other containers.
Toner and developer must not be placed into other containers, as some
containers may change the characteristics of the supplies. Vinyl chloride
potentially changes the characteristics of supplies due to migrating
plasticizers.
4) Precautions during storage and transportation
- Toner and developer additives are sensitive to temperature and humidity (high
temperature or humidity in particular).
- Store toner and developer in a dark and cool location (lower than 95 ˚F/35 ˚C)
and out of direct sunlight.
- Be careful not to expose toner and developer to rain or direct sunlight during
transportation. When delivered by truck the temperature inside must not
exceed 104 ˚F/40 ˚C. (Under the sun in summer, the inside temperature
can typically be 140 ˚F/60 ˚C or higher in a closed vehicle compartment.)
- In cold climate, store in a low humidity environment condition.
Do not store supplies near heaters.

223
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

5) Safety and hygiene

Due to its properties, Toner can be easily wind blown.
Toner on skin does not cause any health risk. However inhalation is undesirable
even if the powder is simply dust. Therefore, be careful not to inhale toner.
- Handle the toner carefully when changing cartridges. Developer should also
be handled carefully when poured into the developer unit.
If you inhale toner by mistake, rinse your mouth out with water.
Toner on the skin should be washed off with soapy water.
- Toner stuck on clothing must be removed while in a dry state with a vacuum
cleaner, brush or by beating, then by washing with soapy water.
Wiping off with benzine, alcohol, or thinner is not recommended as it may
partially melt the components of toner resulting in a stain and spot.
- Toner spills must be removed with a vacuum cleaner, and then wiped with a
cloth which has been dampened with a neutral detergent.
- If exposed to flames toner and developer will burn. Keep these supplies away
from open flames.
- Any used consumable (photoreceptor, developer and toner) should be recycled.
- Wear rubber gloves, eye protection etc. before handling any solvents such as
IPA.

224
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.3. New Image Stabilizing Technology
To improve the copy quality, a new Toner Density Controller (QUANTUM II System) is developed.
The most important aim was to stabilize the Toner Density under various office environments.
Up to now, the control method was controlled by Laser Power and Grid Voltage. The new method is
controlled by Laser Pulse Duty with the Black and Gray Patterns for the Text and Text/Photo modes,
and the Check Pattern for Photo mode. As a result, it optimizes the solid black density, keeps the line
width consistent, and improves the halftone stability in photo mode.
The following illustrations show the New System.

1. Outline
Digital QUANTUM QUANTUM II
Laser Power Laser Pulse Duty
LSU Control LSU
Patch Grid HVPS Patch
Mark Mark
White
Patch
QUANTUM Check Patch
QUANTUM
Black Patch Black Patch
II
Photo Mode Patch
Bias Voltage

Stable image density control for long period Developed for DP-2310/3010
Control method: Laser Power, Grid Voltage Control method: Laser Pulse Duty Control
Digital QUANTUM QUANTUM II
Black and white density is controlled to be stable Optimizes solid back density and keeps line
by Laser Power and Grid Voltage for long periods. width consistent by Laser Pulse Duty Control.
Difficult to control black solid density and line Improves halftone stability in Photo Mode using
width of the image at the same time. Photo Mode Patch.

2. Control System
QUANTUM Control Execute Timing:
1. After F8-09 (Toner Density Adj) and after F8-14 (Black Density Sensor Adjustment).
2. If QUANTUM Execute Flag* is enabled, when the Power Switch is ON or during Standby Mode.
*: QUANTUM Execute Flag is enabled after 8 hours have past
Timer / Counter since the previous QUANTUM control.
3. After 200 sheets print in condition No.2, and after every 1,000 sheets are printed.
4. Manual start by General Function Mode > Manual Copy Quality Adjustment. ...etc.
Toner Density
Control Laser Pulse Duty Control QUANTUM
QUANTUM IIII
Control
Control
Transfer
Control

OPC
LSU Drum

Check Patch
Toner Density Control Black Patch P Mode Gray
Image Density Sensor
Patch Pattern
Toner Density Sensor

Check Black
Temperature Sensor
Humidity Sensor Photo Mode Gray

225
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
3. Control Method
Text, T/P Mode Control Photo Mode Control
Control Point
Table4

Image Density
Table5 Table3

Image Density
High Density Table2
(Black Patch)
Table1
Ideal Curve

Low Density
QUANTUM adjusts (Check Patch)
In Photo Mode, QUANTUM
the pulse width (On/Off selects the optimum photo
timing) of the Laser to mode table.
maintain constant copy 0 255
quality. Print Density Data 0 255
Print Density Data
Print Image Edge Control
Check Pattern Black Density
Pattern
Detects the edge of the image and
controls the laser pulse width
QUANTUM II (On/Off timing).
Laser
Toner
Laser Pulse Duty Control Black Density: Laser
at the edge of the print image. Pulse Width Duty Control

ON Laser
Print Data Input
Toner
Black Density: Grid Voltage (HVPS)
Printed Data Output and Laser Power Control

4. QUANTUM Adjustment
Compensation Values after DP-2310/3010 Adjustment
F5-25 QUANTUM ON
F6-80: QUANTUM Photo Mode Read
F6-81: QUANTUM Halftone Read (Laser Duty of Checkered Pattern)
F6-82: QUANTUM Black Read (Laser Duty of Black Pattern)

F5-25 QUANTUM OFF

F6-95: Manual Photo Adjustment (1-5)*1
F6-96: Manual Halftone Adjustment (Laser Duty of Checkered Pattern) (127-255)*2
F6-97: Manual Black Adjustment (Laser Duty of Black Pattern) (127-255)*2
*1: Select Photo Mode : Gamma Table Number
*2: Laser Pulse Width Duty from 50% (127) to 100% (255)

Reference for DP-3510/4510/6010

F5-25 QUANTUM ON
F6-80: QUANTUM Exposure Voltage
F6-81: QUANTUM Bias DC Voltage
F6-82: QUANTUM Charge Voltage

226
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5. Installing / Replacing Developer

F8-09 Toner Density Adjustment (TDC)

TDC Adjustment + QUANTUM Control

7 min. 1 min.
Automatically

After F8-09 => F6-21: TDC Gain Voltage (0.1% / Step)

F6-26: TDC Judgement Level

6. Installing / Replacing OPC Drum & Sensor Replacement

F8-14 Black Density Gain (Sensor Output)

Gain Adjustment + QUANTUM Control

1 min. 1 min.
Automatically

After F8-14 => F6-65: Black Density Reference (Voltage)

F6-66: Black Density Output (Quantum Compensation = 0)

7. Service Parameters for Copy Image Compensation

Scanner Printer Text, T/P Mode

CCD MED Laser
Image QUANTUM Target
Error Duty LSU
Sensor Scanner Gamma Gamma Diffusion Control

Printer Photo Mode

Density Control 3 Dots
PWM
Printer Gamma Control
7 Steps: Control Panel

Read Density LSU PWM Adjustment

• F6-49 Text Mode Image Density
• F6-39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 2
• F6-50 T/P Mode Image Density
3 dots PWM adjustment value of LSU
• F6-51 Photo Mode Image Density (In case of LSU replacement)

Cotrast Print LSU PWM pattern • F8-18 LSU PWM Pattern 2

• F6-54 Text Mode Contrast • Perform F8-18 and print out the Halftone Patch Pattern
• F6-55 T/P Mode Contrast (3 dots PWM)
• F6-56 Photo Mode Contrast • Check the slightly visible level of the halftone and
input the position value to F6-39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 2.

Auto Contrast QUANTUM

• F5-50 Auto Contrast Adjustment
• F5-25 Digital QUANTUM (QUANTUM On/Off)
Auto ON/OFF
Default: ON

227
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.4. Mechanical Operation
6.4.1. Scanning Mechanism (Flatbed)
1. Scanning Mechanism
The Scanning Mechanism consisting of Lens, CCD PCB Assy (207), Mirrors, Xenon Lamp (204), Lamp
Base Bracket (224) and Mirror 2 Bracket (233), is used to scan originals.
• The Mirror 1 (264) and Mirrors 2 (265) reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens.
• The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.
• The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electrical signal.
• The Inner and Outer Timing Belts (202 & 203) driven by the Stepping Motor (201), move the Scanner
Assembly.
Mirror 1 (264)
Reflection Plate (231) Glass Assembly (557)
Xenon Lamp (204)
Outer Timing Belt (203)
Glass S (559)
Lamp Base Bracket (224) Inner Timing Belt (202)
Mirror 2 (265)

Size Sensor 1 (270)

Mirror 2 (265) Lens
Mirror 2 Bracket (233) CCD Assembly (207)
Stepping Motor (201)

2. Transmit Mechanism
a. When ADF is used, originals are scanned on the Glass S (559). The Glass Assembly (557) is used
when scanning on the Platen.
b. The Scanning point is established by the Size Sensor 1 (270).
c. Document size is automatically set by the Original Size Sensor (1045) or manually set when the
Platen is used.
d. The Transmit Mechanism starts feeding and scanning originals based on the above Document Size
Setting.
e. When scanning is completed, the Stepping Motor (201) stops rotating and the Lamp Base and
Mirror 2 Brackets (224 & 233) return to the standby position.

During scanning, the Lamp Base Bracket (224) and Mirror 2 Bracket (233) move in the direction of the
Black arrow and while returning to standby position, it moves in the direction of the White arrow as
shown in the illustration below. The location of these two brackets are established by the Size Sensor 1
(270) and the scanning length is established by the setting on the Touch Panel. The following illustrates
the Drive system.

228
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

When scanning originals

When returning to Standby position

Detection Sensor (270) Stepping Motor (201)

Rear Mirror Clamp (235)

Rear Lamp Belt Lock (226)

Drive Shaft (256)

Lamp Base Bracket (224)

Mirror 2 Bracket (233)

229
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.5. Automatic Document Feeder
The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, one original at a time. Its
main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller
4. Oversized Feed 2 Roller for stable scanning

The following is the ADF Mechanical operation description.

6.5.1. Automatic Document Feeder
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation with the Eject phase in order to feed and eject any documents stuck
inside the ADF. The Clutch (1788) starts rotating and lowering the Original Stopper (1737) and the Pre-
Feed Roller (1731), after a few seconds the Clutch reverses the rotation direction raising the Document
Stopper to its standby position.

2. Original Setting and Size Sensors

Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Document Stopper.
Adjust the Original Guides (1605 & 1606) to center the original on the ADF. The Document Stopper
prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor (1045) detects the
presence of documents on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Actuator 1 (1836) on the ADF Cover
(1831). The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC Board (19116) which is installed in the ADF Input
Tray (1604) are actuated by the Original Guides, their position determines the original's width and the
Original Length Sensor1 (1045) and Length Sensor2 (1045) detect the length of the original.

3. Feeding and Separation

When the Start button is pressed, the Clutch (1260) starts to rotate and lowers the Document Stopper,
causing the Pre-Feed Roller (1731) to apply a downwards pressure against the originals. After a few
seconds, the Clutch (1260) reverses the direction of rotation and the Pre-Feed Roller is raised upwards
along with the Document Stopper. The upper original is fed to the ADF Roller (1728), and the
Separation Roller (1740) with Torque Limiter prevents multiple feeding.

4. Transmission and Ejection

The original is fed into the Drive Roller (3205) and when the original actuates the Read Point Sensor
(1045), the ADF Roller stops rotating. The Eject Sensor (1045) detects the scanning position and the
Feed 2 Roller (1753) transports the original while scanning. The Stamp Head (1636) stamps an [X]
mark on the front of the original after the document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of
the Stamp Head (1636) and Stamp Solenoid (1635). The Exit Roller (1751) feeds and ejects the
original out of the ADF. If there are additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.

230
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original on the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the
Document Stopper to its standby position.

edger)
Automatic Document Feeder

LS1, 2)

(L
)
)

420 (A3
NVOICE

.8
364 (B4
-R)

431
330.2 (F
- R)
Separation Document

297 (A4
Roller ADF Roller Stopper Pre-Feed Roller

257 (B5
Original Detection

)
(I
(1737)

210 (A5
(1740) (1728) (1731) Sensor (1045)

.9
38

21 5
Drive Roller
(3205)

Read Point
Sensor(1045)
Exit Roller (1751)
Eject Sensor
(1045) Stamp Head (1636)

Feed 2 Roller
(1753)

Pinch Roller (1627) Pinch Roller (1627)

(Registration Adjustment) (Feed Skew Adjustment)

231
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.5.2. Inverting Automatic Document Feeder
The i-ADF automatically inverts two-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This feature
enables machines with a duplexer mounted to perform duplex copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions in a similar manner as the ADF (Automatic
Document Feeder), with the main exception being the document eject path after scanning. The following is
the description of the main differences.

1. Switching from the ADF mode to the i-ADF mode

After passing through the Read Point Sensor (1045), the path of the original is switched over by the
Duplex 2 Guide (1857), to the Exit Roller (1751) or to the Inverting Feed Roller (1853).For single-side
scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid (1770) guiding the original to the
Exit Roller. For double-side scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid
(1770) guiding the original to the Inverting Feed Roller (1853).The Duplex 2 Guide moves only once, in
the direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before
the Start button is pressed. It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if
the last operation was 2-sided scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).

2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original

The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the Duplex
2 Guide (1857) and Inverting 1 Guide (1858).
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide,
through the Inverting 1 Guide (1858) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid (1762) and is
carried beyond the Inverting Feed Roller (1853) and upper Pinch Rollers (1838) into the Sub Tray
(1617).
The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the
Duplex Eject Sensor (1045) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
Then, the Inverting 1 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF
Motor (1801) pulls the original back around the Feed 2 Roller (1753) and proceeds to scan the Back
side of the original.
After the Back side is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide, through the
Inverting 1 Guide and is carried beyond the Inverting Feed Roller and lower Pinch Rollers (1838) this
time, into the Sub Tray, again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.

3. Eject by Reverse Rotation

For the originals to stack properly, the above process repeats one more time. The Inverting 1 Guide is
rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor pulls the original back
around the Feed 2 Roller, however, this time the original is routed to the Exit Roller (1751) and exits
into the ADF Base (1633).

4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (1617), which supports the originals during the ejection
mode of the double-side scanning operation.
The Release Lever Plate (1735) grasps the originals and prevents them from being ejected into the
Sub Tray.

232
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

edger)
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

LS1.2)
Pre-Feed Roller

(L
)
420 (A3
(1731)

210 (A5 VOICE)

Separation

.8
)
-R)

364 (B4
Roller

1
Original Detection Sensor (1045)

330.2 (F
-R)

3
(1740) Document

297 (A4

4
Stopper Pinch Roller (1627)

257 (B5
Pinch Roller ADF Roller

215.9 (IN
)
(1838) (1728) (1737)
(Feed Skew Adjustment) Release Lever 38
Plate (1735)
Drive Roller
(1872)

Read Point
Sensor (1045)

Eject Sensor Sub Tray (1617)

Inverting Feed Roller (1853)
(1045)
Pinch Roller (1627)
Duplex Eject Inverting 1 Guide (1858)
Sensor (1045) Duplex 2 Guide (1857)
Exit Roller (1751)

Feed 2 Roller
(1753) Read Point Stamp Head (1636)
Reversing 1 Guide (1752)
Pinch Roller Pinch Roller (1838)
(1838) (Reverse Registration or Feed Skew Adjustment)
(Registration Adjustment)

233
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.6. Receive Mechanism
6.6.1. Paper Feed Modules
1. Paper Feed Module (1st/2nd/3rd/4th)
< NP Sensor Operation >

NP Actuator (1133)

NP Sensor (1045)

a. The NP Actuators (1133) attached to the Paper Feed Blocks No.1, 2, 3 and 4 determine if there is
paper in the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lifts up the NP Actuator, allowing the light from the LED to actuate the
NP Sensor (1045).

234
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
< Paper Feed Module Operation >

Clutch (1105)
Registration Actuator (1120)

Registration Sensor (1045)

Paper Feed Roller

(1144)

C25 Gear Roller

(1145)

C25 Gear Roller

(1145)

a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor (907) starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch (1105) is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper
Feed Roller (1144). The paper is separated into individual sheets by the C25 Gear Roller (1145) and
is transported.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller (1121), activating the Registration Sensor (1045).
After a specified period of time, the Clutch (1105) is turned ON and the Registration Roller (1121)
and the Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor (1045) and after a specified period of time, the
Clutch (1105) is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

235
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
< Paper Feed Module (Optional) Operation >

Clutch (957)

Registration Sensor(1045) Intermediate Roller (3106)

Actuator 2 (3104)

Paper Feed Roller

(1144)
C25 Gear Roller
(1145)

Drive Motor
(2402)
C25 Gear Roller
(1145)

a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor (907) and the Drive Motor (2402) start driving
the Gears.
b. The Clutch (1105) is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper
Feed Roller (1144). The paper is separated into individual sheets by the C25 Gear Roller (1145) and
transported by the Intermediate Roller (2306).
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller (1121), activating the Registration Sensor (1045).
After a specified period of time, the Clutch (1105) is turned ON and the Registration Roller (1121)
starts rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor (1045) and after a specified period of time, the
Clutch (1105) is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

236
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
< Paper Feed Module Lift up Mechanism >

NP Sensor (1045)

Paper Feed Roller

(1144)

C25 Gear Roller

(1145)

Lift Plate (2009)

Bottom Plate (2008)

a. When inserting the Paper Tray into the machine, the NP Sensor (1045) activates. At the same time,
the Lift Plate (2009) is combined with the coupling which drives the Lift Plate of the machine. The
Lift Plate rotates, lifting the Bottom Plate (2008) and the Recording Paper.
b. Once the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper are raised, the NP Sensor (1045) is turned ON.
The Lift DC Motor (1152) stops rotating, maintaining the recording paper at the certain level.

237
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
< Paper Feed Module Recording Paper Size Setting >

Coupling (1171)
Lift DC Motor (1152) NP Sensor (1045)

a. The Recording Paper size in the Paper Feed Module is set on the Touch Panel.

238
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
2. Sheet Bypass
< NP Sensor Operation >

a. The NP Actuator attached to the Paper Feed Unit determines if there is paper in the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lowers the NP Actuator and the NP Sensor (1045) actuates.

< Sheet Bypass Operation >

Paper Feed Roller (1144)

Pressure Plate (1237)

Separator Pad (1242)

Separator Holder (1209)

NP Sensor (1045) NP Actuator (1210)

a. When the printing operation begins, the PRINT (Print Request Signal) turns On and the Main Motor
(907) starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch (1105) is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper
Feed Roller (1144). The paper is raised by the Pressure Plate (1237) and transported to the
Separator Pad (1242). The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separator Holder
(1209).
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller (1121), activating the Registration Sensor (1045).
d. After a specified period of time, the Clutch (1105) is turned ON and the Registration Roller (1121)
and the Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
After lowering the Pressure Plate (1237) during the specified period of time, the Clutch is turned
OFF and the Paper Feed Roller (1144) stops rotating.
e. After the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor (1045) and after a specified
period of time, the Clutch (1105) is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch
Roller stop rotating.

239
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.6.2. Laser Unit
LSU Chassis
Laser
Beam Detection
Sensor Collimator Lens

Beam Detection
Lens

Aperture

Cylindrical Lens

Polygon Mirror/
Polygon Motor

F Lens
Cover Glass Beam Detection
Reflection Mirror
1. Laser
This Laser uses the semiconductor laser. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.4
mW.
2. Collimator Lens and Cylindrical Lens
These lenses converge and focuse the laser beam, converting it to parallel light.
3. Aperture
This controls the size of the laser beam.
4. Polygon Mirror and Polygon Motor
The polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror, directly driven by a DC motor, revolving at 42,000
rpm. The laser beam is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the
scanning direction.
5. Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor
The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor,
which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line.
6. F-θ Lens
This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the
drum, providing a constant scanning speed.
7. Cover Glass
This prevents a particle of dust invading into the LSU.

240
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.6.3. Fuser Operation
The paper passes through the Fuser Roller (1026) and is subjected to heat and pressure in the Fuser Unit.
Pressure between the Fuser Roller (1026) and Pressure Roller (1027) fuses or bonds the toner into the
paper.

Upper Finger (1067)

Recording Paper

Pressure Roller (1027)

Exit Roller (1028)

Cleaning Web Roller

(1083)

Fuser Roller (1026)

Thermistor Assembly
(1041)
Thermal Fuse (1040)

Thermostat (1038)
Fuser Lamps (1043/1044)
Fuser Roller (1026)
A Teflon coated roller supplies heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the surface is
kept constant at approximately 190°C (± 10°C) (or 374°F).

Fuser Lamps (1043, 1044)

Located in the Fuser Roller (1026) are 2 Fuser Lamps (1043, 1044) that serve as the heat source for the
Fuser Roller (1026).

Thermistor Assembly 1 & 2 (1041, 1042)

A heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller (1026), monitors the surface temperature and
keeps the temperature at the specified level by controlling the Fuser Lamps (1043, 1044).

Thermostat (1038) and Thermal Fuse (1040)

The Thermostat (1038) and the Thermal Fuse (1040) are installed in the Fuser Roller (1026), providing
an extra overheat protection.

Printer Motor (901)

The Main Motor (907) provides the driving force to the Fuser Roller (1026) through the Fuser Roller
Gears.

Pressure Roller (1027)

This converted PFA tube Silicon Rubber Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding
the toner to the paper.

241
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Cleaning Web Roller (1083)
The Cleaning Web Roller (1083) is installed in the Fuser Unit, which keeps cleaning the surface of the
Fuser Roller (1026).

When the Fuser Unit does not reach the specified temperature within a certain period of time, an Error code
is shown on the display, stopping the operation.
When the Thermistor Assembly (1041, 1042) is disconnected or the surface temperature of the Fuser Roller
(1026) is out of limit, an Error code is shown on the display, stopping the operation.

242
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
6.7. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name Function

+12V +12 VDC Power Supply
+24V +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VD1 +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VD2 +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VHL +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VFB +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VFL +20/+24 VDC Power Supply
+24VFP +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VM +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VOPC +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VOPF +24 VDC Power Supply
+3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5V +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VD +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VP +5 VDC Power Supply
24ELS Scanner 24V Sensor Error Signal
ACL AC Power Supply
ACLRLB AC Power Supply
ACN AC Power Supply
ACNRLB AC Power Supply
ACSW Fuser Relay
AGND Ground
BD_A Beam Detect A
BMCNT Toner Bottle Motor Control Signal
BTHP Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
BZCLK Buzzer Signal
BZOFF Buzzer OFF
CDSN1 Density Sensor 1 Signal
CDSN2 Density Sensor 2 Signal
CDSSOL Density Sensor Solenoid
CR0 Charge Control AC Clock
CR1 Charge Control DC ON/OFF PWM
CR1 Charge Control AC Current
CSSRXD CSS Reception Data
CSSTXD CSS Transmission Data
DAA1 ADF Motor Current Control Signal
DADATA D/A Converter Serial Data
DACLK D/A Converter Serial Clock
DALTH D/A Converter Serial Latch
DR0 Development Control AC ON/OFF PWM
DR1 Development Control DC ON/OFF PWM
DUPCLH1 ADU Clutch Control Signal
ELPCNT Discharge Lamp
FLNG Inverter Control Signal
GACLK+ Gate Array Clock +

243
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
GACLK- Gate Array Clock -
GND Ground
GOPSW1 Developer Missing Detection
HSYNC Horizontal Synchronous Signal
HUMSN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
IICSCL IIC Transmission Clock
IICSDA IIC Transmission Signal
IOUTA Motor Control Signal
IOUTB Motor Control Signal
IPRXD Finisher IPC Reception
IPTXD Finisher IPC Transmission
KCDET Key Counter Option Detection
L+5V Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply
L1 (R) Line Signal
L2 (T) Line Signal
LD Motor Lock Detection Signal
LD2WAY Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDBT Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCST Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCST2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCST3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCST4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDOR Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDUP1 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDUP2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDUP3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDUP4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEN Laser Control
LDESEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEX1 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEX2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEX3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEX4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDFPCHK2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDFPCHK3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDFPCHK4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDHTJ Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDI+ Laser Diode Control +
LDI- Laser Diode Control -
LDJAM2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDJAM3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDJAM4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDMF4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDMFP Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDMFR Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPHK2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPHK3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage

244
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
LDPHK4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPS Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDRSEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDTF Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPL Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPL2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPL3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPL4 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDWTD Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LEDA Select Sensor Signal
LEDC Select Sensor Signal
LEDX Select Sensor Signal
LEDY Select Sensor Signal
LEDZ Select Sensor Signal
LPOW1 Low Power Control 1
LPOW2 Low Power Control 2
MCLK+ Master Clock +
MCLK- Master Clock -
MGND Ground
N.C. Not Used
n2WAYKEP1 Paper Stopper Solenoid Signal
n2WAYKEP2 Paper Stopper Solenoid Signal
n2WAYSEN Inner Upper Tray Paper Exit Signal
nA3SEN Sheet Bypass Paper Size Detection Signal
nAA3S Original Width Detection Signal
nAADL1 Original Length Detection Signal
nAADL2 Original Length Detection Signal
nAAPNT Original Detection Signal
nAB1SN Read Point Detection Signal
nAB2SN Duplex Eject Detection Signal
nAB4S Original Width Detection Signal
nACLOCKAD1 ADF Motor Control Clock Signal
nADF3 3rd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
nADF4 4th Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
nAEJC Original Eject Detection Signal
nAKEEP1 Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nAKEEP2 Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nAOAC ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
nAPACHG Duplex 2 Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nAPICR Release Lever Plate Solenoid Control Signal
nAREV ADF Exit Cover Open Detection Signal
nASTAMP Stamp Control Signal
nASTROAD1 ADF Motor Control Strobe Signal
nATT Attention Signal
nB4SEN Sheet Bypass Paper Detection Signal
nCASET Paper Tray Detection Signal (1st Feeder)
nCCLH1 Feed 2 Roller Clutch Control Signal

245
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
nCCLH2 ADF Roller Clutch Control Signal
nCCLH3 Inverting Roller Clutch Control Signal
nCLPIN AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal
nCOUNT Counter Drive Signal
nCST2 2nd Paper Tray Detection Signal
nCST3 3rd Paper Tray Detection Signal
nCST4 4th Paper Tray Detection Signal
nCSTOP 2nd Paper Feed Module Detection Signal
nCSTOP4 4th Paper Feed Module Detection Signal
nCTON Ring Detection Signal
nDADFON ADF Option Detection Signal
nDOOR Paper Transport Unit Open Detection Signal
nDUACK Duplex Print Acknowledge Signal
nDUPSEN1 Duplex Sensor 1 Signal
nDUPSEN2 Duplex Unit Paper Detection Signal
nDUPSEN3 Duplex Unit Paper Detection Signal
nDUPSEN4 Duplex Unit Paper Detection Signal
nDUREQ Duplex Print Request
nESEN Inner Exit Tray Paper Detection Signal
nEXDF1 Paper Transport Unit Paper Detection Signal
nEXDF2 Paper Transport Unit Paper Detection Signal
nEXDF3 Paper Transport Unit Paper Detection Signal
nEXDF4 Paper Transport Unit Paper Detection Signal
nFDPCHK2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
nFDPCHK3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
nFDPCHK4 4th Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
nFNRDT Fan Ready Signal
nFNRDTB Scanner Fan Ready Signal
nFNRDTL LSU Fan Ready Signal
nFNRDTP LVPS Fan Ready Signal
nGARST CCD PCB Reset Signal
nHDF Multi Feeder Feed Roller Drive Signal
nHKOF External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
nHTJAM Fuser Unit Jam Sensor Signal
nIMMP0a Motor Drive Signal
nIMMP0b Motor Drive Signal
nJAMDOR2 2nd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
nJAMDOR3 3rd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
nJAMDOR4 4th Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
nKCNT Key Counter Option
nKEEP1 Paper Stopper Solenoid Signal
nKEEP2 Paper Stopper Solenoid Signal
nLIFT1 1st Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
nLIFTM2 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
nLIFTM3 3rd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
nLIFTM4 4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
nLPOW1 Not Used

246
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
nLPOW2 Not Used
nMFPCK Sheet Bypass Paper Detection Signal
nMFRCHK Sheet Bypass Pressure Plate Detection Signal
nMFSEN4 Sheet Bypass Paper Length Detection Signal
nMMCK Main Motor Clock
nMMON Main Motor Rotation Control Signal
nMMP0a Motor Drive Signal
nMMP0b Motor Drive Signal
nMMRDY Main Motor Ready Signal
nMRCLH3 3rd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
nMRCLH4 4th Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
nOE Output Enable (Image Data)
nOP2WAY 2Way Unit Detection Signal
nOP3ENB Option Feed FIFO Enable
nOP3FCK Option Feed FIFO Clock
nOP3FDIN Option Feed FIFO Input
nOP3FLD Option Feed FIFO Load
nOP3FLT Option Feed FIFO Latch
nOP3FOT Option Feed FIFO Otput
nOP3RST Option Feed FIFO Reset
nOPDUP Duplex Unit Detection Signal
nOPTRP Transport Unit Installed Detection Signal
nORI Home Position Detection Signal
nPACK Printer ACK Signal
nPCHK1 1st Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
nPCHK2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
nPCHK3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
nPCHK4 4th Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
nPMON Polygon Motor Rotation Signal
nPMRDY Polygon Motor Ready Signal
nPNLRST Panel Reset Signal
nRRCLH Registration Roller Drive Signal
nPRDY Printer Ready Signal
nPRGDWN F-ROM Rewrite
nRSEN Registration Sensor Signal
nPVSYNC Print Registration
nS/H Sample Hold Signal
nSACK Scan ACK Signal
nSEN1 AFE Serial Data Output Enable Signal
nSENTIM Scanner LSYNC Signal
nSREQ Scanner Request Signal
nSSR1 Heater Control Signal
nSSR2 Heater Control Signal
nSSR3 Not Used
nSYNC Horizontal Synchronous Signal
nTNSCLH Toner Clutch Control
nTRPJAM Transport Unit Open Detection Signal

247
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
nTRPSEN1 Transport Unit Sensor Signal
nTRPSEN2 Transport Unit Sensor Signal
nTRPSEN3 Transport Unit Sensor Signal
nTRPSEN4 Transport Unit Sensor Signal
nVRDY VSYNC Reset Signal
nVREQ Print ACK Request Signal
nWAKE FAX Wake Up Signal
OPCCNT OPC Drum Clutch Control Signal
OUTA Motor Control Signal
OUTB Motor Control Signal
P/S Motor Start/Stop
pADF2 2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
pBLKCLP AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
pCMLD Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
PFCLCNT Paper Feed Clutch Drive Signal
pFLON Inverter Ground
pLIFT2 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
pLIFT4 4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
PMCK Polygon Motor Clock
pMMP0a Motor Drive Signal
pMMP0b Motor Drive Signal
pMRCLH2 2nd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
PNLDO1 Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data
PNLSCK1 PNL1 Serial Clock
POWCNTV Laser Power Control Signal
pPRXD Reception Data Signal
pPTXD Transmission Data Signal
pSPCRST SPC Reset Signal
pSPKOT Line Dial Tone Signal
pTRPKEP1 Transport Unit Solenoid Signal
pTRPKEP2 Transport Unit Solenoid Signal
pTRPMDA Transport Unit Motor Signal
pTRPMDB Transport Unit Motor Signal
pTRPMNA Transport Unit Motor Signal
pTRPMNB Transport Unit Motor Signal
pUPLIMIT1 1st Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
pUPLIMIT2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
pUPLIMIT3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
pUPLIMIT4 4th Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
pVREF1 Transport Unit Motor Current Setup Signal
pVREF2 Transport Unit Motor Current Setup Signal
pZCIN Heater Control Signal
RETRACE Laser Control
SCLK+ AFE Serial Data Clock +
SCLK- AFE Serial Data Clock -
SDI AFE Serial Data Signal
SLPKY Sleep Key

248
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Signal Name Function
SPCRXD SPC Reception Data Signal
SPCTXD SPC Transmission Data Signal
SPOW Scanner 24V Control Signal
STRVP Control Signal
TDREF Toner Density Reference Sensor
TDSN Toner Density Sensor Signal
TED Toner Detect Sensor Signal
TEMPSN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
TFSN Toner Waste Sensor Signal
TG TG Signal for Product Line
THERMA1 Fuser Thermistor A1
THERMA2 Fuser Thermistor A2
THERMB1 Fuser Thermistor B1
THERMB2 Fuser Thermistor B2
TR0 Transfer Control Transfer Output
TR1 Transfer Control Cleaning Output
TxCLKOUT+ Image Data Transmission Clock +
TxCLKOUT- Image Data Transmission Clock -
TxOUT0+ Image Data Out 0 +
TxOUT0- Image Data Out 0 -
TxOUT1+ Image Data Out 1 +
TxOUT1- Image Data Out 1 -
VCDS Density Sensor ON
VCNT Inverter Control Signal
VINA Sensor Input Signal
VINX Sensor Input Signal
VOUTA Sensor Control Signal
VOUTB Sensor Control Signal
VOUTX Sensor Control Signal
VTED Toner Detect Sensor ON
WEBSOL Web Solenoid Control Signal
WTBSN Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Signal
X1 Touch Panel Matrix Signal
X2 Touch Panel Matrix Signal
Y1 Touch Panel Matrix Signal
Y2 Touch Panel Matrix Signal

249
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

7 Installation
7.1. Precautions During Set Up

Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.

Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:

1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:

• High temperature, high humidity, low temperature or low humidity

• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
• Exposed to direct sunlight
• Dusty environment
• Poorly ventilated location
• Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
• Exposed to strong vibration
• Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent)

2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:

DP-2310/3010 : 181 lb (82 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed

3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 Amps
for 120 VAC, or 10 Amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a
qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated
for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)

4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)

5. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.

Using the space requirements shown on page 2, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it
requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.

250
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Space Requirements for Copier and Options
Copier

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

23.58 in (599 mm) 14.2 in (379 mm)

27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

46.38 in
(1178 mm)

Copier + Outer Exit Tray

3.46 in (88 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm)

10.83 in (275 mm) 14.92 in (379 mm)

23.58 in (599 mm)
27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

60.67 in
(1541 mm)

Copier + Finisher
3.94 in (100 mm)

9.88 in 14.84 in 23.58 in (599 mm) 14.92 in (379 mm)

(251 mm) (377 mm)
27.83 in (707 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

51.65 in (1312 mm)

15.94 in (405 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

71.06 in
(1805 mm)

251
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
7.2. Unpacking

Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness or any shipping damage before
installation.
Remove all filament tapes used to secure the Fuser and Process Units during shipment.

Caution:
The machine weights approximately 181 lb (82 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use
the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

7.3. Installation Procedure

Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing Stands or other Options.
2. The following machine illustrations, depict a DP-3010 with the USA/Canadian standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller locked in the opened position to
avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Roller.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller.

7.3.1. Installation Procedure

(1) Pull out to lock the Left Front Handle in place.

Note:
To release the Handle, push the Release Latch
toward the machine and push the Handle into the
machine.

252
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(2) Open the Left Rear Handle Cover and swing

the Handle downwards to lock it in place.

Note:
To release the Handle, pushing the Release Latch
toward the machine, pull out then lift up the Handle
into the machine.

(3) Open the Right Front Handle Cover and swing

the Handle downwards to lock it in place.

Note:
To release the Handle, pushing the Release Latch
toward the machine, pull out then lift up the Handle
into the machine.

253
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(4) Open the Right Rear Handle Cover, lift up and

pull out the Handle to lock it in place.

Note:
To release the Handle, pushing the Release Latch
toward the machine, push down the Handle into
the machine.

(5) Lift and place the machine on a suitable

Stand / Paper Tray, aligning with front and side
covers.
Plain Stand (DA-DA310 / DA320)
Paper Tray (DA-DS303 / DS304)
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 181 lb (82 kg)
with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries,
use the appropriate number of personnel and the
proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

<Unlocking the Scanner>

(6) Remove the Protective Tape from the Battery.

(7) Remove 3 Screws.
(8) Remove the Left Platen Cover.

254
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(9) Remove the Tape.

(10) Remove 1 Blue Screw.
(11) Remove the Shipping Metal Bracket by rotating
counterclockwise to unlock the Scanner.
(12) Re-install the Left Platen Cover.

(13) Store the Shipping Metal Bracket and the Blue

Screw into the space provided in the 1st Paper
Tray.

<Unlocking the Pressure Roller>

(14) Open the Right Cover.

(15) To unlock the Pressure Roller, using a Stubby
Phillips Screwdriver, tighten 2 Screws recessed
in the holes located on the Upper Fuser Cover.

<Installing the Stamp Assembly for USA/Canada>

(16) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.

(17) Lower the Inverting Guide 2 Assembly.
(18) Install the Stamp Assembly.

255
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

<Preparing the Process Unit>

(19) Remove 1 Screw.
(20) Remove the Front Fixing Metal Bracket (longer
plastic tab).
(21) Remove 1 Screw.
(22) Remove the Rear Fixing Metal Bracket (shorter
plastic tab).

(23) Carefully remove the packing tape and protective

sheet from the OPC Drum Assembly.
(24) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction
of the arrow and remove.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(25) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the

Developer Cover.

(26) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).
(27) Pour the appropriate developer evenly into the
developer unit. Make sure to empty the bottle.
(28) Close the Developer Cover.
(29) Re-install the OPC Drum Assembly.
(30) Re-install 2 Fixing Metal Brackets and 2
Screws.

256
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(31) Remove the Tape and the Instruction Paper.

Note:
Before installing the Process Unit into the
Machine, ensure that the Shutter's alignment
guide is positioned as illustrated.
Incorrect

Alignment Guide

Correct

Incorrect

(32) Open the Front Cover wide.

(33) Remove 1 Screw.
(34) Remove the Connector Cover (Clear Blue).

257
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(35) Install the Process Unit.

Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
the Right Cover is still open before inserting the
Process Unit into the machine.

Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

(36) Fasten the Process Unit with 1 Screw.

(37) Connect the Harness and re-install the
Connector Cover and Screw.
(38) Shake the Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to loosen
the contents.
(39) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit. Align
the Toner Bottle Key with the Key Alignment
Channel of the hopper unit. Insert the Bottle as
far as it will go and turn the Toner Bottle
clockwise until it locks in place. (Bottle's Green
Knob is lined up with the "Locked" symbol on the
Process Unit label)
(40) Install the Toner Waste Container.
(41) Close the Front and the Right Covers.
(42) Load paper into all of the trays.
(43) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
Note:
Perform the following adjustments after the
machine has warmed up and displays:

Ready To Copy
Set Originals

258
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
7.3.2. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment
1. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to
enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
3. Press the "START" key.
4. Press the "0", "9" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode, setting "9" (Toner Density Adj).
5. Press the "START" key to begin the automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 8 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.

F8-09 (Installation & Developer replacement)

TDC Adjust QUANTUM II

7 min 1 min

Automatically

7.3.3. Black Density Sensor Output Gain Adjustment

1. Press the "1", "4" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment), setting
"14" (Black Density Gain).
2. Press the "START" key for automatic Black Density Sensor Output Gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops.
Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
3. Press the "STOP" key.
4. Press the "6" and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
5. Write the contents of F6-21, 26 and 65 on the memory sheet (included inside the 1st Paper Tray).

F6-21 : TDC Gain Voltage

F6-26 : TDC Judgement Level
F6-65 : Black Density Reference

6. Press the "STOP" key.

7. Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

F8-14 (Installation & OPC / Black Density Sensor replacement)

Gain Adjust QUANTUM II

30 sec-1 min 1 min

Automatically

7.3.4. Set the Date and Time

1. Press the "FUNCTION" key.
2. Touch the "GENERAL SETTINGS" button.
3. Select the "09 Key Operator Mode".
4. "Input Identification Code" (default is 0000).
5. Touch the "OK" button.
6. Touch the button to advance to 05/08 Display Screen of General Settings.

259
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
7. Select the "20 Date Time Setting".
8. Touch the "CHANGE" button to input the new Date and Time. (MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm) [24-hour format].
9. After setting the new information, touch the "OK" button on the Display Panel.
10. Press the "RESET" key, to exit the General Settings mode.

7.4. Adjustment
7.4.1. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)
Caution:
Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18 and 19) are set to "0".
DO NOT adjust these settings in the field.

F6-17 : Charge Roller Voltage compensation

F6-18 : Standard Laser Power compensation
F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage compensation

1. Press the "FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to
enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
3. Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10).
a. Gray scale “1” should not be visible.
b. Gray scale “2” should be clearly visible.

1 Not visible

2 Clearly
visible
3

5. Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
6. Press the “6” and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
7. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
8. Press the "INPUT" button.
9. Enter the new content.
10. Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
The “RESET” key is used to enter the “-” content.
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
11. Press the “OK” key twice.
12. Enter F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat Step (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.
F6-49 : T Mode Image Density (Text)
F6-51 : P Mode Image Density (Photo)
14. Press “FUNCTION” and “C” (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

260
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

8 Options and Supplies

8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation
To use PCL (DA-PC300) or PS (DA-MC300) option individually or in combination with other options,
changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with
the options.

Note:
The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600
is needed is if you are installing the PostScript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of
these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added.

Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.

The firmware for SC, SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware
with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.

Firmware Version Table

Standard Firmware PCL Firmware PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type A) (SC = Type B) (SC = Type D)
SC DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx
PNL SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxx_xx ← ←
SPC SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxx ← ←
Slot 1 FROM PCB Not Required Required Required

261
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

262
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx 1
\ SC_STD \ DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx 2
\ SPC \ SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.

5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.

2. Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx.exe

263
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp (DATA lamp) turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER]
button, it is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.

Transferring
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File
Order
\ DP-2310_3010_xx_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2AxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2BxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-SFDL2CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-SFDL2CxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx DP-SFDL2DxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-SFDL2ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-SFDL2ExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SPC \ SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx SFDL2SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
\ PNL \ SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx SFDL2PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx.bin 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note:
1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
2. Please refer to the Firmware Update Tool OI for additional details.
3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.

Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.

264
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC300)
8.2.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- PCL KEY
DZRQ000227 or
1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
DZRQ000228
1 DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only
License Agreement
1 DZSH000113 For Other Destinations
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000692 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.2.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

265
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service
Notes of this manual.
(7) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.

266
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC300)
8.3.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- PS KEY
DZRQ000223 or
1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
DZRQ000224
1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label DZNK004647
1 DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only
License Agreement
1 DZSH000113 For Other Destinations
1 License Agreement ----- For Adobe PostScript Driver
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000686 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.3.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

267
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL
Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service
Notes of this manual.
(7) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with
the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
(8) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front
Cover as illustrated.

268
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.4. Installing the Network Scanner Module (DA-NS600)
8.4.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- NWS KEY
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000506 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.4.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

269
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(6) Install the PDMS Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.

270
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.5. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module (DA-NF600)
8.5.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- IFX KEY
1 Operating Instructions (For i-FAX) See Note
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000547 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.5.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

271
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(6) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the
steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the
F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode".
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize".
e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes"
button.
f) Press the "STOP" key.
g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR)
keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
(7) Install the Internet Fax/Email Software into the
PC with the Operating Instructions by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

272
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD30) is also installed.

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD30) is
installed.
Caution:
Before executing the Auto Dial Clear, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the
Address Book Editor in the PDMS software. After executing the Auto Dial Clear, re-enter the printed
Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book
file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer)

Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode"
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize"
e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address
Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit
will return to stand-by.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste)
to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:
The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the PDMS, 3 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-2310/3010.
1) The "DP-2310/3010" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-2310/3010.
b) Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-2310/3010" window appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.

273
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

274
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.6. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG300)
8.6.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 FXB PC Board Assembly See Note
1 MJR PC Board Assembly See Note
1 MJR Harness DZFP001461
1 LIN Harness DZFP001465
1 Speaker DZFP001317
1 Telephone Line Cable See Note
1 Type Approval Label See Note
1 Line Label DZNK004956
5 Screw XTW3+6LFC

1 Operating Instructions (For Facsimile) See Note

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000691 This document
Note:
1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first.
2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.6.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.

CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

275
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Release the Pre-installed 2 wire Harness from

2 Harness Clamps.

(4) Plug the FXB PC Board Assembly into the SC

PC Board with on Board Connector.
(5) Secure the FXB PC Board Assembly with
1 Screw (XTW3+6LFC).
(6) Connect the Pre-installed 2 wire Harness (gray
connector) to the FXB PC Board (CN393 : white
connector).
(7) Secure the Pre-installed 2 wire Harness with
Harness Clamp on the FXB PC Board.

(8) Connect one end of the MJR Harness and LIN

Harness to the MJR PC Board Assembly (CN22
and CN25).

(9) Remove the Lower Protective Tab on the Left

Rear Cover for the LINE connection.
If installing an External Telephone, remove the
upper protective tab as well.
(10) Attach the Line Label to the Left Rear Cover as
illustrated.

276
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the

rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into
the slots on the frame.
(12) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 2
Screws (XTW3+6LFC).
(13) Connect the MJR PCB Harnesses to the FXB
PC Board (CN391 and CN392).

(14) Open the Right Cover and Front Cover.

(15) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(16) Remove 1 Screw.

(17) Remove the Connector Cover (Clear Blue).

(18) Disconnect the Harness.

(19) Loosen 1 Screw.
(20) Slide the Process Unit out.
Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
the Right Cover is still open before pulling the
Process Unit out.

277
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(21) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out.

(22) Remove 3 Screws.
(23) Remove the Front Left Cover.

(24) Remove the Blind Label.

(25) Install the Speaker as illustrated.
(26) Secure the Speaker with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).
(27) Connect the Speaker Harness.
(28) Insert the Speaker Harness into the Harness
Clamp.
(29) Re-install the Front Left Cover, the Process Unit
and the Toner Waste Container.

(30) Attach the Type Approval Label (specified

destination) to the Lower Rear Cover as
illustrated.

278
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(31) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(32) Connect one end of the Line Cable (Telephone)
to the LINE Jack on the left side of the machine,
and the other end to the RJ-11C Jack on the
wall.
(33) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(34) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note:
following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware For other destinations, set the Function Parameter
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. #005 (Destination Code).
PB : UK 000 : Austria
PF : France 001 : U.K.
PG : Switzerland 002 : Canada
PK : China 003 : Denmark
PM: Germany 004 : Taiwan
PT : Taiwan 005 : Finland
006 : Germany
PU : USA
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro

279
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(35) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the

steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously
in that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the
F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance)
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode"
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize"
e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes"
button
f) Press the "STOP" key
g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR)
keys simultaneously to exit the Service
Mode.
(36) Verify the position of the stamp on the
document. If it is not within the desired location
at the bottom of the document, you can adjust its
position by following the steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously
in that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the
F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters)
c) Press "69 Stamp Position Adjust"
d) Press "INPUT" and enter a number
(-50 to 50).
Note:
A positive number moves the stamp
position closer to the trail edge of the
document, conversely, a negative number
moves it in the opposite direction.
To change the current sign to either +/-,
press the "RESET" key.
(Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/step)
e) Press "OK" key twice.
f) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR)
keys simultaneously to exit the Service
Mode.

280
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.6.3. Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD30) is also
installed

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD30) is
installed.
Caution:
Before executing the Auto Dial Clear, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the
Address Book Editor in the PDMS software. After executing the Auto Dial Clear, re-enter the printed
Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book
file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer)

Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode"
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize"
e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address
Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit
will return to stand-by.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste)
to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:
The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the PDMS, 3 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-2310/3010.
1) The "DP-2310/3010" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-2310/3010.
b) Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-2310/3010" window appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.

281
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

282
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.7. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD30)
8.7.1. Contents

<USA and Canada>

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks
1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) DZHL000002
1 DC PCB DZEC102176
1 HDD Bracket DZHP008927
1 HDD2 Harness DZFP001467 Power Supply Cable
1 HD Harness DZFP001499 Flat Cable
1 DC12 Harness DZFP001468 3 Connectors
4 Harness Clamp (Small) DZJK000067
2 Harness Clamp (Medium) DZJK000068
4 Silver Screw FFPFA0152

4 Screw XTW3+6LFC

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000696 This document

<Other Destinations>
Qty. Description Part No. Remarks
1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) DZHL000002
1 DC PCB DZEC102176
1 HDD Bracket DZHP008927
1 HDD2 Harness DZFP001467 Power Supply Cable
1 HD Harness DZFP001526 Flat Cable
1 DC12 Harness DZFP001468 3 Connectors
4 Harness Clamp (Small) DZJK000067
1 Harness Clamp (Medium) DZJK000068
1 Harness Clamp (Metal) DZJK000077
1 Harness Clamp (Plastic) DZJK000059
4 Silver Screw FFPFA0152

4 Screw XTW3+6LFC

2 Screw XYN3+F8

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000696 This document

Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

283
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.7.2. Installation
1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is
installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB
(DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required.
Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).
2. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.

CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

(3) Install the DC PC Board onto the Rear Cover as

illustrated.
(4) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).
(5) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Small).
(6) Connect the HDD2 Harness to CN143 and
DC12 Harness to CN141 & CN142.

284
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(7) Install 3 Harness Clamps (Small).

(8) Secure the HDD2 Harness with the 2 Harness
Clamps.
(9) Secure the DC12 Harness with the 4 Harness
Clamps.
(10) Route the DC12 Harness through the access
hole in the side frame.

(11) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws (Upper) and

2 Silver Screws (Lower).
(12) Remove the Left Cover.

(13) Remove 2 Screws.

(14) Open the LVPS Cover.

(15) Connect the DC12 Harness to CN145 on the DC

PC Board.
(16) Secure the DC12 Harness with the 2 Harness
Clamps.

285
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(17) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket.

(18) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Screws
(FFPFA0152).

<For USA and Canada>

Follow steps (19)~(29) below.
[For Other Destinations, skip to steps (30) ~ (39)]

(19) Connect the HDD2 Harness to the HDD.

(20) Install the HDD Assembly.
(21) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).
Note:
Exercise caution not to pinch the wires under the
HDD Assembly.
(22) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).
(23) Connect one end of the HD Harness to the HDD.
(24) Secure the HD Harness with the Harness
Clamp.

Note:
Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to
Correct Incorrect the HDD correctly as illustrated.
1) The Key on the connector must be facing
Upwards.
2) Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into
the HDD. However, the correct one is shown
HDD HDD in Figure Left (Harness comes out from the
top of the connector).

286
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(25) Connect the other end of the HD Harness to

CN59 on the SC PC Board.
(26) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).
(27) Secure the HD Harness with the Harness
Clamp.
(28) Re-install all Covers.
(29) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

<For Other Destinations>

Follow steps (30)~(39) below.

(30) Remove 1 Screw to release the Ground

Harness.

(31) Connect the HDD2 Harness to the HDD.

(32) Install the HDD Assembly.
(33) Secure the HDD Assembly and the Ground
Harness with 2 Screws (XTW3+6LFC).
Note:
Exercise caution not to pinch the wires under the
HDD Assembly.

(34) Connect one end of the HD Harness to the HDD.

(35) Secure the HD Harness with the Harness Clamp
(Metal) and 1 Screw (XYN3+F8).

287
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Note:
Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to
Correct Incorrect the HDD correctly as illustrated.
1) The Key on the connector must be facing
Upwards.
2) Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into
the HDD. However, the correct one is shown
HDD HDD in Figure Left (Harness comes out from the
top of the connector).

(36) Connect the other end of the HD Harness to

CN59 on the SC PC Board.
(37) Secure the HD Harness with the Harness Clamp
(Plastic) and 1 Screw (XYN3+F8).
(38) Re-install all Covers.
(39) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

CAUTION!
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed
(similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord.

8.7.3. Perform the following steps if the Optional Fax Communication Board (DA-FG300)
or the Internet Fax/E-Mail Module (DA-NF600) is also installed.

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD30) is
installed.
Caution:
Before executing the Auto Dial Clear, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the
Address Book Editor in the PDMS software. After executing the Auto Dial Clear, re-enter the printed
Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book
file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer)

Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode"
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize"

288
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address
Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit
will return to stand-by.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste)
to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:
The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the PDMS, 3 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-2310/3010.
1) The "DP-2310/3010" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-2310/3010.
b) Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-2310/3010" window appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-2310/3010 (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

289
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.8. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)
8.8.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Accounting Software CD DZRQ000107 Includes Operating Instructions
DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only
1 License Agreement
DZSH000113 For Other Destinations
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000573 This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.8.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD30) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD30).
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Press the "START" key.
4) Press the "4", "2" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT Counter".
5) Press the "DEPT." and "OK" buttons to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.
6) Press the "STOP" key.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code
To change it:
• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Mode (Electronic Counter).
• Press the "START" key.
• Select "01 Key Operator ID Code".
• Press "CHANGE" button, and input a 4-digit code.
• Press "OK" button to set it and "OK" again to exit F7 Mode (Electronic Counter).

7) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.

1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, "GENERAL SETTINGS", "09 Key Operator Mode" and input
the 4 Digit Code to enter the Key Operator Mode.
2) Press "19 Dept. Counter Mode" and set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).
3) Press the "STOP" key to return to the stand-by mode.

290
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.9. Installing the DD Server Software (DA-WS20)
8.9.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

DZRQ000109 or
1 DD Server Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
DZRQ000110
DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only
1 License Agreement
DZSH000113 For Other Destinations
1 DD Server Operating Instructions DZSD001791
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000574 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.9.2. Installation
Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the
Installation Wizard.

291
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.10. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)
8.10.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Expansion F-ROM Board DZEC102137
2 PC Board Support NH-7
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000507 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

292
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on

the SC PC Board.
(4) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot
1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board and secure with
the Supporters.
Note:
The Program Extension F-ROM Board must
always be installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL
or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.

(5) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(6) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

293
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.11. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB
(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B)
8.11.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

DZEC102306 16 MB
1 Image Memory DZEC101919 64 MB
DZEC102307 128 MB
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000262 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.11.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

294
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on

the SC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
Make sure to insert the SDRM PC Board at a
20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then
lock it down.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Cover and
re-install remaining Covers.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

295
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.12. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)
8.12.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

UE-410047 4 MB
1 Image Memory
UE-410048 8 MB
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.12.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.

(2) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card

as illustrated.
Caution:
Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage
to the card or machine.

(3) Re-install the Cover.

(4) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

296
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.13. Installing the 3rd Paper Tray (DA-DS303) / 4th Paper Tray (DA-DS304)
and the Stand for 4-Paper Tray Configuration (DA-DA230-PA)
8.13.1. Contents

<DA-DS303> 3rd Paper Tray

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 3rd Paper Tray Unit -----
4 Bracket DZJA000723
1 Size Label DZNK002812
8 Screw XTB3+8J
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000687 This document

<DA-DS304> 4th Paper Tray

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 4th Paper Tray Unit -----
4 Bracket DZJA000723
1 Size Label DZNK002812
8 Screw XTB3+8J
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000687 This document

<DA-DA230-PA> Stand for 4-Paper Tray Configuration

Note:
This option is available only for specified destinations.

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Caster DZMM000020
2 Joint C Plate DZKK000070
1 Joint F Plate DZKK000073
1 Joint G Plate DZKK000074

4 Screw DZPD000005

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000687 This document

297
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.13.2. Installing the 3rd and 4th Paper Trays
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Slide the 4th Paper Tray out of the unit.

(2) Place the 4th Paper Tray Unit on top of the
Caster.
Note:
The side with the silver seal, indicated with an
(a) in the illustration, is the Front side.

(3) Remove 2 Silver Screws.

(4) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

298
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(5) Join the Caster and the 4th Paper Tray Unit
with the Joint C Plates (FR/RR), Joint F Plate
(FL) and Joint G Plate (RL).
(6) Secure the Joint C Plates, Joint F Plate and
Joint G Plate with 4 Screws.

(7) Place the 3rd Paper Tray Unit on the 4th Paper
Tray Unit.
(8) Remove 2 Silver Screws.
(9) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(10) Slide the 3rd Paper Tray out of the unit.

(11) Install the 4 Brackets.

(12) Secure the 4 Brackets with 8 Screws.

(13) Connect the Harness of the 4th Paper Tray Unit

to CN808 on the CST3 PC Board of the 3rd
Paper Tray Unit.
Note:
Ensure the White Mark on the connector is facing
Upward, inserting the connector upside down, may
damage the machine's SPC or CST PC board.

(14) Place the Harness into the clamp.

299
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(15) Place the machine on top of the 3rd Paper Tray

Unit as illustrated.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 181 lb (82 kg)
with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries,
use the appropriate number of personnel and the
proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(16) Remove 2 Silver Screws.

(17) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(18) Slide the 2nd Paper Tray out of the unit.
(19) Install the 4 Brackets, see Step (11).
(20) Secure the 4 Brackets with 8 Screws.

(21) Connect the Harness of the 3rd Paper Tray Unit

to CN772 on the CST2 PC Board of the 2nd
Paper Tray Unit.
Note:
Ensure not insert to the connector upside down,
as it may damage the machine's SPC or CST PC
board.

(22) Place the Harness into the clamp.

(23) Re-install the Lower Rear Covers and the
Paper Trays.
(24) Level the machine with the 4 Adjusters as
illustrated.
(25) Attach the Size Label(s) onto the 3rd/4th Paper
Tray(s).

300
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.14. Installing the Plain Stand (DA-DA310 / DA320) for USA Only
8.14.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

2-Paper Trays
Plain Stand (DA-DA310 = High) -----
Configuration
1
3-Paper Trays
Plain Stand (DA-DA320 = Low) -----
Configuration

4 Leveler GP5084

1 Joint Bracket A (Right Front) GH7878

Shorter piece
1 Joint Bracket B (Right Rear) GH7879

1 Joint Bracket D (Left Front) GH7880

Longer piece
1 Joint Bracket E (Left Rear) GH7881

4 Screw DZPD000005

1 Installation Instruction DZSM000724 This document

8.14.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Note:
The following illustrations depict the Installation of Plain Stand (DA-DA310).

(1) Open the top of the carton

(2)
(2) (2) Install 4 Levelers into each corner leg.
(3) Turn the Stand right side up while its still in the
carton and then lift and remove the carton.
(2)

(2)

301
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(4) Place the machine on top of the Plain Stand as

illustrated.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 181 lb (82 kg)
with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries,
use the appropriate number of personnel and the
proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(5) Remove 2 Silver Screws.

(6) Open the Jam Access Cover.
(7) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(8) Open the Front Cover of the Plain Stand.

(9) Open the 2nd Paper Tray.
(10) Connect the machine to the Plain Stand with 4
Joint Brackets.
(11) Secure each Joint Bracket with 4 Screws.
(12) Close the 2nd Paper Tray and the Front Cover of
the Plain Stand.
(13) Re-install the Lower Rear Cover.

(14) Place the machine at a desired location and

lower the leveler on each corner to stabilize the
machine.
(15) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

302
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.15. Installing the Plain Stand (DA-DA310-PA / DA320-PA)
8.15.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

2-Paper Trays
Plain Stand (DA-DA310-PA = High) -----
Configuration
1
3-Paper Trays
Plain Stand (DA-DA320-PA = Low) -----
Configuration

1 Joint Bracket A (Right Front) DZKK000068

Shorter piece
1 Joint Bracket B (Right Rear) DZKK000069

1 Joint Bracket D (Left Front) DZKK000071

Longer piece
1 Joint Bracket E (Left Rear) DZKK000072

4 Screw DZPD000005

1 Installation Instruction DZSM000738 This document

8.15.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Note:
The following illustrations depict the Installation of Plain Stand (DA-DA310).

(1) Place the machine on top of the Plain Stand as

illustrated.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 181 lb (82 kg)
with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries,
use the appropriate number of personnel and the
proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

303
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(2) Remove 2 Silver Screws.

(3) Open the Jam Access Cover.
(4) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(5) Open the Front Cover of the Plain Stand.

(6) Open the 2nd Paper Tray.
(7) Connect the machine to the Plain Stand with 4
Joint Brackets.
(8) Secure each Joint Bracket with 4 Screws.
(9) Close the 2nd Paper Tray and the Front Cover of
the Plain Stand.
(10) Re-install the Lower Rear Cover.

(11) Place the machine at a desired location and

lower the leveler on each corner to stabilize the
machine.
(12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

304
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.16. Installing the 1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS300)
8.16.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 1-Bin Finisher See Note
1 Finisher Tray Assembly PF4124K127
1 Base Bracket PF4124P001
1 Front Slide Guide Bracket PF4124P002
1 Rear Slide Guide Bracket PF4124P003
1 IPC PC Board PF4117P003
ETXDN282A4AA For USA and Canada
1 Optional LVPS For EU and Other
ETXDN282E4AA
Destinations
1 FNS Harness DZFP001448
1 LVS2 Harness DZFP001407
2 Snap Ring PF2252P619

4 Thumb Screw (Silver) PF4124P023

7 Screw XTW3+6LFC

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000689 This document

Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS300), read these entire
instructions.
8.16.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

Note:
3.94 in (100 mm) Make sure that there will be adequate space for
3.94 in working area (i.e., removal of paper).
(100 mm) 3.94 in
(100 mm)
51.65 in
(1312 mm) 3.94 in
(100 mm)

71.06 in
(1805 mm)

305
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(1) Open the Right Cover.

(2) Remove 2 Silver Screws.
(3) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(4) Remove 2 Silver Screws.
(5) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(6) Cut off the Protective Tab on the Rear Cover.

(7) Remove 1 Screw.

(8) Remove the Access Plate.
(9) Remove 2 Screws.
(10) Remove the HP Cover.

(11) Install the Connector of the FNS Harness to the

HP Cover.
(12) Secure the Connector with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).

306
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(13) Secure the Ground Harness with 1 Screw

(XTW3+6LFC).

(14) Re-install the HP Cover.

(15) Secure the HP Cover with 2 Screws.
(16) Connect one Harness to Intermediate
Connector.
(17) Route the FNS Harness through the upper hole
to the main PC Board area.

(18) Remove 4 Silver Screws.

(19) Open the Rear Cover.

Caution:
If the Red LEDs on the SC and SPC PC Boards
are ON, the Power is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.

307
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(20) Pull the FNS Harness from the bottom hole and
secure with the Harness Clamp.
(21) Connect the Harness to CN724 on the SPC PC
Board.

(22) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board to CN725 on

the SPC PC Board.

(23) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws (Upper) and

2 Silver Screws (Lower).
(24) Remove the Left Cover.

(25) Remove 2 Screws.

(26) Open the LVPS Cover.

308
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(27) Release the pre-installed Harness from the

Harness Clamp.

(28) Install the Optional LVPS.

(29) Secure the Optional LVPS with 4 Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).

(30) Connect the LVS2 Harness to CN64 on the

Optional LVPS and to CN102 on ACD PC Board.
(31) Secure the LVS2 Harness with the Harness
Clamp.
(32) Connect the pre-installed Harness to CN65 and
CN66 on the Optional LVPS.
(33) Close the LVPS Cover.
(34) Re-install the Left Cover.

(35) Hook the Base Bracket and secure with 2 Silver

Thumb Screws (PF4124P023).
Note:
a. Ensure that the Mylar Sheet on the Base Bracket
does not get damaged.
b. It is easier to align the screw holes, if you insert
the Front Screw first.

309
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(36) Place the Finisher on the Base Bracket.

Note:
Make sure that 2 Lock Levers Hook into the
Guide Bracket properly.

(37) Install 2 Slide Guide Brackets.

(38) Secure 2 Slide Guide Brackets with 2 Silver
Thumb Screws (PF4124P023).

(39) Install the Finisher Tray Assembly.

(40) Secure the Finisher Tray Assembly with
2 Snap Rings.

(41) Close the Rear Cover and re-install all Covers.

(42) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with
the Interface Cable.
(43) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

310
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.17. Installing the Exit Tray [Inner] (DA-XN200)
8.17.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Inner Tray DZML000339
1 Paper Holder Base DZJA000782 This will not be needed
1 Paper Holder DZJM000473
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000295 This document

8.17.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

Before Installing this Option

<<Perform this step first to avoid overlooking it later>>
Set the Service Parameter to activate the Tray by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "5" and "START" keys to enter the F5 Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Enter F5-35 "Output Tray (Inner 2)".
4) Press "Yes" key.
5) Press "OK" key twice.
6) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
7) Reboot the machine after setting the parameter to activate the setting.

(1) Cut off the Paper Holder at the joint into two
parts with a nipper as illustrated.
Note:
a. Cut ends neatly.
b. Dispose of the bottom part of the Paper
Holder.

(2) Install the Paper Holder to the Paper Holder

Base which is already installed on the center of
the Jam Cover.
Note:
a. Make sure that the rib side of the Paper
Holder is facing the exit cover.
b. When installing, swing the bottom part of the
Paper Holder to the left as illustrated.

311
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3) Swing the Paper Holder to the left.

(4) Install the Inner Tray in the direction of the arrow
holding up the Paper Holder.
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

312
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.18. Installing the Exit Tray [Outer] (DA-XT200)
8.18.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Outer Cover Assembly DZHP003762
1 Exit Tray Assembly DZML000343

4 Silver Screw XTW3+10LFN

2 Screws will not be used
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000296 This document

8.18.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

Before Installing this Option

<<Perform this step first to avoid overlooking it later>>
Set the Service Parameter to activate the Tray by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "5" and "START" keys to enter the F5 Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Enter F5-37 "Output Tray (Outer)".
4) Press "Yes" key.
5) Press "OK" key twice.
6) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
7) Reboot the machine after setting the parameter to activate the setting.

(1) Cut off the protective tabs on the Left Side Cover
and the Left Rear Cover (Upper Tab Only).
(2) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws from the
upper side of the Left Side Cover.

(3) Install the Outer Cover Assembly.

(4) Secure the upper side with 2 Shoulder Silver
Screws, that were removed in Step (3) above.
(5) Secure lower side with 2 Silver Screws
(XTW3+10LFN).
Note:
2 of the Silver Screws (XTW3+10LFN) will not be
used.

313
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(6) Install the Exit Tray Assembly onto the Outer

Cover Assembly.
(7) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.

314
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.19. Installing the Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AS200) and
the Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AR250)
< For EU and Other Destinations >
8.19.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

Automatic Document Feeder See Note
1
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder See Note
1 Scanning Pad DZJM000428
2 Hinge Stopper DZJA000726
2 Hinge Cover DZMC000713
2 ADF Mounting Bracket DZJA000730
2 Thumb Screw DZPA000064
DZHP000237 For USA/Canadian models
1 Stamp Unit
DZHP000240 Other Destinations
2 Screw XSN4+W10FN Silver
6 Screws for European
5 Screw XTB3+8J
models
8 Screw XTB3+12J
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000261 This document
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.19.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Install the 2 ADF Mounting Brackets.

(1) (2) Secure the 2 ADF Mounting Brackets with 8
Screws. (XTB3+12J)

(2)

(2)

315
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(3)
(3) Install 2 Thumb Screws, one on each ADF
6~8mm
Mounting Bracket.
Note:
When installing the 2 Thumb Screws, do NOT
tighten the Screws. Keep about 6-8mm space as
illustrated.

(4) Install the Automatic Document Feeder on top of

the ADF Mounting Brackets.
(4) Note:
a. Set the Automatic Document Feeder in the
direction of the arrow.
b. Align the hallmark on the right side of the
Hinge Base and the ADF Mounting Bracket
as illustrated.
(5) (5) Tighten the 2 Thumb Screws (Silver).
(6) Secure the Automatic Document Feeder with 2
(7) (6) Screws. (XSN4+W10FN Silver)
(7) Install 1 Screw on the back of the left ADF
Mounting Bracket from the bottom. (XTB3+8J)
(8) Remove 1 Screw.
(9) Remove the CN Bracket.

(9)

(8)

(10) Bend the protective Tab on the CN Bracket more

than 90° as illustrated.

(10)

316
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(11) Connect the Connector of the Automatic

Document Feeder Unit.
Note:
Be sure the connector is secured with the
Latch on both side.

< For European Models Only >

(11) After connecting the Connector of the
Automatic Document Feeder Unit, secure the
Ground Wire with 1 Screw as illustrated.

(11)
For European Models Only

(12) Re-install the CN Bracket.

(13) Secure the CN Bracket with 1 Screw.

(12)

(13)

(14) Using a lined original (about 20lb (80 g/m2)

< Example of Printed Image > weight paper), make a copy from the ADF / i-
Document Leading Edge ADF to check for feeding alignment.

Skewed to
the right

317
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(15) Check the printed copy. If the printed image is

skewed either to the Right or Left, adjust the
ADF position following the procedure below:
a. Loosen the 5 Screws securing the ADF / i-
ADF.
b.
b. Using the Hallmark on the Right Hinge Base
and the ADF Mounting Bracket as a guide,
a.
shift the ADF position following the procedure
below:
• When the printed image is skewed to the
a. right, shift the ADF toward the front of the
machine slightly.
a. • When the printed image is skewed to the
left, shift the ADF toward the rear of the
machine slightly.
c. Tighten the 5 Screws loosened in step 15a.
d. Repeat step 14 to recheck the feeding
alignment and readjust the ADF position as
needed.
(16) Check for spacing between the ADF Unit and the
Scanning Glass Guide as illustrated.
Space
ADF Unit

Scanning Glass
Guide

Scanning Glass

(17) If there is no spacing, adjust the Platen Glass

(b) position following the procedure below:
(c) (d) a. Open the ADF Unit.
b. Remove 3 Screws (Silver).
c. Remove the Left Platen Cover.
(d) d. Loosen 2 Screws.
e. Shift the Scanning Glass Guide to the left
(e)
and tighten the 2 Screws.
f. Re-install the Left Platen Cover and secure
it with 3 Screws (Silver).

(18) Install the 2 Hinge Stoppers.

(19) Secure the 2 Hinge Stoppers with 4 Screws.

(18) (19)

318
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(20) Install the 2 Hinge Covers.

Note:
When installing the Hinge Covers, make sure
that each Hinge Film is put inside of each
Hinge Cover.

(20)

(21) Peel off the 6 adhesive protectors from the

Scanning Pad.
(23)
(22) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning on
1mm the upper left corner, keeping 1mm space as
illustrated.
(22) (23) Close the Automatic Document Feeder.
Note:
Re-open the ADF Unit and push the Scanning
(21)x6 Pad gently to paste it properly.

(24) Lift the ADF Input Tray.

(25) Open the ADF Exit Cover.
(24)

(25)

(26) Install the Stamp Unit.

(26) (27) Close the ADF Exit Cover, and lower the ADF
Input Tray.
(28) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 90, 91, 92, 93
and 94) to adjust the ADF Scanning Position.

319
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Printed Adjustment Adjustment

Document Image Amount Remarks

No.90 0.05mm
A
ADF Read Main
1 Point
Scan Pos.
(Adjustment of
ADF image
read start position)
Paper
Travel
A 0.05mm

A 1 Point

No.91 0.3mm

Original Lead
1 Point
Edge ADF
Shadow of
Document
(Adjustment of 0.3mm
Paper Leading Edge
original detection Travel
timing) 1 Point
Void

No.92 0.3mm

Orig. Trail Rebooting is

1 Point
Edge ADF not necessary
Shadow of to enable the
(Adjustment of Paper
Document
0.3mm Parameter
Leading Edge
original trail Setting.
Travel
edge detection)
1 Point
Void

No.93 0.1%
ADF 100% Reduced
Image 1 Point
1-Sided
(Adjustment of 0.1%
ratio when the Enlarged
scan is made) 1 Point

No.94 0.1%
ADF 100% Reduced
Image 1 Point
2-Sided
(Adjustment of 0.1%
ratio when the Enlarged
scan is made) 1 Point

< When adjusting the ADF Unit >

Adjust the ADF Unit to scan the lined part
(inside of the margin 1.5 - 2.5mm)
on the document as shown on the right.
Image
Data

320
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.20. Installing the Platen Cover (DA-UC200)
< For EU and Other Destinations >
8.20.1. Contents

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Platen Cover DZMA002394
1 Scanning Pad DZJM000428
2 Platen Hinge DZMH000013
4 Screw XTB3+12J
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000303 This document

8.20.2. Installation
(1) Install the 2 Platen Hinges.
(2) (1) (2) Secure the Platen Hinges with 2 Screws each.
(2)
(1)

(3) Install the Platen Cover.

(4) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning on
(3)
the upper left corner.
(5) Peel off the 6 adhesive protectors from the
Scanning Pad.
(4)
(6) Close the Platen Cover.
Note:
(5)x6 Re-open the Platen Cover and push the
Scanning Pad gently to paste it properly.

321
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.21. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DA-KH200)
8.21.1. Contents
Note:
The Key Counter is sold separately.

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 KEY Harness DZFP000928 Longer
1 KC Harness FFPWC0392 Shorter
1 KC Bracket DZJA000786
1 Key Counter Cover DZMD000034
2 Screw DZPA000063
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000279 This document

8.21.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.

(1) Remove 4 Screws.

(2) Open the Rear Cover.

(3) Remove 4 Screws.

(4) Remove the Right Rear Cover and the Rear
Right Cover.

(5) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Rear Cover.

322
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(6) Connect the KEY Harness into the KC Harness.

(7) Connect the KEY Harness to CN726 on the
SPC PC Board.
(8) Insert the KC Harness through the access hole
of the RR Frame.
(9) Secure the KEY Harness with 3 Harness
Clamps.
(10) Re-install the Right Rear Cover and the Rear
Right Cover, and close the Rear Cover.

(11) Route the Key Counter Socket Harness

through the KC Bracket.

(12) Connect the Key Counter Socket Harness into

the KC Harness.
(13) Install the Key Counter Socket.
(14) Secure the Key Counter Socket with 2 Srews
(DZPA000063).

Note:
If you are not installing the Key Counter at this
time, cover the opening with the Key Counter
Cover and secure it with 2 Screws.

323
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.22. Replacing the OPC Drum
(1) Open the Right Cover.
(2) Remove 1 Screw.
(3) Remove the Harness Cover.
(4) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm and the Front
Arm.

(5) Open the Right Cover and hook the Angled

Rear Arm into the lower Hook Hole.

(6) Open the Front Cover.

(7) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(8) Remove 1 Screw.

(9) Remove the Connector Cover (Clear Blue).

324
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(10) Disconnect the Harness.

(11) Loosen 1 Screw.
(12) Slide the Process Unit out.
Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
the Right Cover is still open before pulling the
Process Unit out.

Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

(13) Remove 1 Screw.

(14) Remove the Front Fixing Metal Bracket (longer
plastic tab).
(15) Remove 1 Screw.
(16) Remove the Rear Fixing Metal Bracket (shorter
plastic tab).

(17) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction

of the arrow and remove.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

325
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(18) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.
(19) Remove the Front DSD Arm.
(20) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the right side where
the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was
installed.

(21) Clean the Bias Charge Roller with a soft dry cloth
that came with the new OPC Drum.

(22) Insert 2 LTR (A4) size papers (brand new)

under the Bias Charge Roller passing through
the Discharge Light slit as illustrated.
Note:
The width of the paper should cover the entire
width of the Bias Charge Roller.

(23) Lift both sides of the papers and cover the Bias
Charge Roller, then place the OPC Drum Shaft
Holder on top of the papers to act as a weight.

326
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(24) Ensure that the OPC Drum is fully coated with

the Drum Starting Powder. Apply additional
Drum Starting Powder onto the surface of the
OPC Drum if required.
Note:
Do not touch the surface of the OPC Drum with
bare hands when removing or re-installing it.
Grease from fingerprints will affect copy quality.

Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(25) Install the new OPC Drum onto the OPC Drum
Shaft Holder.
(26) Spin the OPC Drum in the arrow direction,
turning by the edge (approximately 1 inch) with
your fingers to collect the powder onto the
cleaning blade and clean the OPC drum surface.
Spin the drum until both papers are released
from the Bias Charge Roller.
Caution:
If it does not spin smoothly, the Cleaning Blade or
Gear(s) may be damaged. Inspect and repair
before proceeding.

(27) Insert the OPC Drum Assembly into the Process

Unit.
(28) Re-install the Process Unit and the Toner Waste
Container.
(29) Perform the Copy Service Mode F8-14 (Black
Density Gain) to clear the OPC Drum Counter.

327
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.23. Replacing the Laser Unit (LSU)
(1) Open the Right Cover.
(2) Remove 1 Screw.
(3) Remove the Harness Cover.
(4) Unlock the Angled Rear Arm and the Front
Arm.

(5) Open the Right Cover and hook the Angled

Rear Arm into the lower Hook Hole.

(6) Open the Front Cover.

(7) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(8) Remove 1 Screw.

(9) Remove the Connector Cover (Clear Blue).

328
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(10) Disconnect the Harness.

(11) Loosen 1 Screw.
(12) Slide the Process Unit out.
Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
the Right Cover is still open before pulling the
Process Unit out.

Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(13) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out.

(14) Remove 3 Screws.
(15) Remove the Front Left Cover.

(16) Remove the Blind Cover.

(17) Remove 2 Screws.
(18) Remove the S Inner Cover.

329
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(19) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(20) Remove 3 Screws.
(21) Remove the LSU Unit.
(22) Install the New LSU Unit.

8.23.1. Laser Power (PWM Circuit) Adjustment

(1) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in
one of the Trays, and pull the other Trays out.
(2) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE
(-5) (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
(3) Press the "8" and "START" keys to enter the F8
Mode (Service Adjustment).
(4) Press "18 LSU PWM Pattern" to print the Test
(0) Pattern.
(5) Observe the position of the uppermost visible
+2 gray patch.
Sample:
4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the
(+5) value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in our
example.

(6) Press the "OK".

In our sample, 4 patches (7) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6
are visible. Mode (Adjust Parameters)
(8) Press "39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust".
Test Pattern (9) Press "INPUT" and enter the value of the gray
patch, as established in Step (5).
(10) Press "OK" button 2 times.
(11) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys
simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

330
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
8.23.2. LSU Skew Adjustment
(1) Remove the Front Left Cover.
(Refer to "Replacing the LSU", steps (1) ~ (15))
(2) Loosen 4 Red Screws.

Adjust the Lever Plate downwards and recheck the

< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge
One scale adjusts the skewed image by
approximately 0.01 mm.

A
Adjust the Lever Plate upwards and recheck the
< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge

331
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

9 General Network Information

9.1. Network Protocol
9.1.1. OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.

The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer Name Function Protocol

7 Application SMB
SMTP
FTP
6 Presentation DNS
HTTP
Telnet
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... etc...
5 Session
TDI

4 Transport TCP/IP
TCP, UDP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
3 Network IP, IPX, etc... IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

2 Datalink PPP... Router Ethernet

MAC Address Token Ring
NIC FDDI
SW Hub ATM
1 Physical Repeater
Hub RS-232C, X21... etc...

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

332
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.1.2. Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.

TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.

The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function
7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI
6 Presentation Session, Presentation and Application
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
5 Session network services.
4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
2 Data Link Network Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Interface the OSI model. This correspondence
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
1 Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.

Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

9.1.3. Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω.
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.

Category Purpose
1 Voice grade telephone line
2 ISDN
3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
4 Token Ring (16M)
5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

333
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology
9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner.
For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from
each station should be unique.
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX

Unique value
Manufacturer ID
MGCS:080023

9.2.2. Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection.
The General sequence is as follows:

Wait for the next available timing to send,

Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)

802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS
8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node,
it must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.

Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit.
When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.

The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

334
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.

When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.

Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.

Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.

Token Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte 1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format
Most significant bit Least significant bit
SFD Access Frame Destination Source Data FCS ED Frame
1 byte Control control MAC MAC 4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte 1 byte 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)
Max 17779 (16M)

There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

335
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.2.3. Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)

Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length

10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)
10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)
100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

Max length (x 100m)

10 BASE 5

Logical speed BASE : baseband (digital)

(Mbps) BROAD: broadband (analog)
10 BASE - T

TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable
no "-" means max length

Ethernet Configuration

336
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

TX (+) TX (+)
1 1 1 1
TX (-)
2 2 2 TX (-) 2
RX (+)
3 3 3 RX (+) 3
RX (-)
6 6 6 RX (-) 6
Straight Cable Crossed Cable

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1" "0"

0V

-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.

If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent.
The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for
collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the
end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.

There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.

9.2.4. Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.

They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.

Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.

9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

337
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.3. Network Layer
9.3.1. IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.

Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.

Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.

Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.

There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.

Class A : First octet reserved for the network address

Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A 0

Class B 1 0

Class C 1 1 0

Network address represented as

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:

Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

338
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.3.2. Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192 168 32 1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255 255 255 0
IP
Subnet Mask

Network
Address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
192.168.32.0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0 Third
255.255.0.0 190.0.3.1 190.0.3.2 190.0.3.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Router Second
190.0.2.1 190.0.2.2 190.0.2.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Ground
Floor
190.0.1.1 190.0.1.2 190.0.1.3
Note 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
Class B Subnet Outline

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.

1. Host address is set to all “0”

2. Host address is set to all “1”
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with “127”
Reserved for loop back address

339
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.3.3. Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.

It performs the following typical functions:

1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte

Version Internet Type Of Service Total Length

Header Length
ID Flags Fragment Offset
Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)

Data

IP Datagram

Terms Detail
Version Currently version 4
Internet Header IP Header field length
Length
Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
ID Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Flags Packet disassembly information
Fragment Offset Offset from most significant bit
Time To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Protocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Source Address Sender’s IP Address
Destination Address Destination’s IP Address
Option When implemented
Padding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit

340
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.3.4. Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.

Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.

These are the typical functions:

1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.

2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

192.168.32/24 192.168.33/24
Router B

PC-A PC-B PC-C PC-D

192.168.32.1/24 192.168.32.2/24 192.168.33.1/24 192.168.33.2/24
OK OK
permission denied
permission denied

Packet Filtering Sample

3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.

4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.

5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.

341
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.4. Transport Layer
9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.

The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram
TCP segment
IP Header TCP Header Application D ata
(20 byte) (20 byte) (vary)

TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length Reserved Control Flag
(4 bit) (6 bit) (6 bit) Window (6 byte)
Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
Option PAD

Data (Segment)

TCP Segment Outline

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

342
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Client SYN, Se
quential
No.=453 Increments No. sequentially
8970

71
K N o .=45389
ACK, A C 24000
n ti a l N o.=19194
que
SYN, Se
ACK, AC Server
K No.=1
9197240
01
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.

The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

343
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.5. Upper Layer
9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.

Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:

Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com

can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.

Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.

This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.

• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

DNS Server (root)

DNS Server (jp)

3
5
2
4 DNS Server (co.jp)
6 7
1
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com) 9
Panasonic DNS Server Mail Server
(panafax.co.jp) mlsv.panafax.co.jp
Device domain

DNS Name Resolution Sample

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

344
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.

All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.

9.5.2. Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone,
it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

9.5.3. Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.

345
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:

IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>

An example of the syntax is shown below:

;
; File: db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
; default parameters for information this DNS is
; authoritative for:
;
@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213 ; serial number
43200 ; refresh every 12 hours
7200 ; retry after 2 hours
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

346
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.5.5. A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy
; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212
ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26
ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.

They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:

<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>

IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:

<alias name> CNAME <host name>

Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

347
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.5.8. NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>

An example of a name server record follows below:

@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp

The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:

<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>

For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.

9.5.11. Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.

348
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.

The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-
SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.

The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc.org/rfc821

Internet
SMTP Server

PC DNS Server POP Server PC

SMTP
POP 3

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route
for <[email protected]>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <[email protected]> Message ID
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <[email protected]>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: [email protected]
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" Content-Type
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

349
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305
9.7.1. Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.

Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.

Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.

Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.

9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file
Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Required
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Strongly Include Message-ID
Recommended Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
Optional supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications

Receiver
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place
MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Required
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Optional Use other TIFF Profiles

350
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Required Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Strongly
Recommended Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
Optional facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC Request For Comment
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
DSN Delivery Status Notification
MDN Message Disposition Notification
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
IFD TIFF Image File Directory
Offramp Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/
gateway G4 facsimile terminals
Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Notice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device

RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301
Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image/tiff MIME Sub-type RFC2302
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for facsimile RFC2306

351
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.7.4. File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)

B/W Color
C (JPEG)
J F
(JBIG) (MMR, MR)
L (JPEG) M (MRC)

MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.

Class Color Coding Method Remarks

S B/W MH Internet Fax minimal set
F B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full mode
J B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed mode
C Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal set
L Color JPEG (lossless, One bit per color,palletized color image, continuos tone
grayscale) color and grayscale images
M Color Mixed Raster Multiple coders and resolution within a page
Content

352
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.7.5. Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.

The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.

Baseline Fields Values

Bits Per Sample 1
Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Fill Order Least significant bit first
Image Width 1728 (A-4)
Image Length N: total number of scan lines in image
New Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
Page Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
Photometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means black
Resolution Unit 2: inch
Rows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
Samples Per Pixel 1
Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF strip
Strip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
X Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)
Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
Extensions Fields
T4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned

9.7.6. Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Domain
Service selector

(2) Sub address FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address Domain
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
(3) Others VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone Domain
Service selector

353
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,
“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119

1. MUST
This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.

9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Header
First IFD Offset
Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Next IFD Offset
Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 0)

Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Next IFD Offset

Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)

File Structure

354
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Message Header Contents

9.7.8. Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.

9.7.9. Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.

The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

355
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.8. Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device SMTP Server

(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
Opening Session

[5 minutes] 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready

HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
SMTP Command

MAIL FROM: <[email protected]>

250 OK
[5 minutes]
RCPT TO: <[email protected]>

[5 minutes] 250 OK
DATA

250 Start mail out;end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

[2 minutes]
DATA BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK

[3 minutes] DATA BLOCK 2

[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n

CR/LF . CR/LF

250 OK
[10 minutes]

QUIT
Closing

221sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing

transmission channel

Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

356
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.8.1. Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:

HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>

QUIT:<CRLF>

In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.

9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.

9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.

9.8.4. Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.

9.8.5. Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

9.8.6. Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.

9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

357
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

211 System status or system help reply

220 <domain> Service ready
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
250 Requested mail action okay# completed
251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
500 Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments
502 Command not implemented
503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
551 User not local; please try <forward-path>
552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
554 Transaction failed

358
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)
9.9.1. Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2. Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.

Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-
ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.

Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.

A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.

A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by

responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

359
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary

Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION state

PASS string
QUIT

STAT valid in the TRANSACTION state

LIST [msg]
RETR msg
DELE msg
NOOP
RSET
QUIT

Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state

TOP msg n valid in the TRANSACTION state

UIDL [msg]

POP3 Replies:

+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.

From: To:

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

360
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device POP 3 Server
(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way
handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <[email protected]>

USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
TRANSACTION
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
UPDATE

TCP 3 way Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <[email protected]>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TRANSACTION TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

361
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.

One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.

Command Sample Purpose

Ping Ping 192. 168. 1. 30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat NetstatNetstat -nr Active connection list
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.

Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

362
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)

START

Is the LAN connected Yes

to an ISP
No No Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No Is static IP address Yes
available ?
Not supported
Yes
DHCP Client? Is there a MX and A Record
Is G3 Gateway entry for your Panasonic
Yes Device in the DNS table ? No
function being used ?
Yes
Not supported
No Yes

Is POP account Is POP account

Yes available ? available ?
No No
Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic No Yes
Device in the DNS table ?
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters Set network parameters Set network parameters for
for POP receiving for SMTP receiving POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
your Panasonic Device
If not ready If not ready If not ready

Ask the Network Check the host name by Ask the Network
Administrator to setup using the DOS Administrator to setup a
a new POP account. command-line "ping" new POP account.
and "nslookup". Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".

Important Notice:
The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function for Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may
ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing
configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system
denied any relay operation.

363
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.

DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.

DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.

In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.

"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.

"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.

Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.

Message Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

364
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Server Client Server
(not selected) (selected)

Begins initialization

Determines DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines

configuration configuration
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration

DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Commits configuration

DHCPACK
Initialization complete

Graceful shutdown

DHCPRELEASE Discards lease

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server Client Server

Begins initialization

Locates DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Locates

configuration configuration
DHCPACK DHCPACK

Initialization complete

Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address

365
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.

INITIALIZATION

INITIALIZE/
REBOOT DHCPNAK/
DHCPACK -/Send DHCPDISCOVER
(not accept.)/
Restart
Send DHCPDECLINE
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
-/Send DHCPREQUES Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer SELECTING

DHCPOFFER/
REBOOTING Collect replies

Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST

REQUESTING REBINDING DHCPNAK/

Halt network
DHCPOFFER/
Discard

DHCPACK/
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
timers T1, T2

T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND

T1 expires/ DHCPACK/
Send DHCPREQUEST Record lease, set
to leasing server timers T1, T2

T1 expires/
Send RENEWING
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the client’s lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

366
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.

(1) Delivery confirmation (required)

(2) Additional document features (optional)

In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Panasonic supports MDN.

Delivery Status Notification (DSN)

A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

fail
SMTP Server SMTP Server
DSN

DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.

SMTP Server SMTP Server

MDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.

367
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.

MDN request

MDN notify

Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.

MDN Response
Read Receipt

Capabilities

(1) MDN Request

Internet FAX (3) SMTP Server SMTP Server (2) Internet FAX

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process

(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address as following formula.

368
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <[email protected]>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: [email protected]
Disposition-Notification-To: <[email protected]>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.

MDN Response Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0
MESSAGE X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
HEADER Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
From: <[email protected]>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: [email protected]
In-Reply-To: <[email protected]>
References: <[email protected]>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

********** Read Receipt **********

BODY
TEXT
This message was opened by
’[email protected]’
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42

******************************************

ATTACHED Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected]

FILE Original-Message-ID: <[email protected]>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

369
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
(3) Processing Confirmation
The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.

To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

370
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.

It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the
global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can
use a web browser to peruse the global Web.

From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-
Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.

Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.

An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.

A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:

<process-ID.clock@hostname>

where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.

371
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)

Challenge Response
<[email protected]> +OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]>

Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD

<[email protected]>PASSWD APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
Possible Responses:
+OK
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) -ERR permission denied
Produces a 16 octet digest value of
c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb STAT

+OK 1

Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-
brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.

When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.

Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

372
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)

220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready

EHLO jgm.example.com

250-smtp.example.com

250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5

AUTH CRAM-MD5

334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

235 Authentication successful

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

SMTP AUTH overview

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.

Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string

<[email protected]>

Genrates Digest parameter

Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
Fred 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e

BASE64 encoded string

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

373
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.

If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.

The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".

Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.

432: A password transition is needed

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.

538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.

454: Temporary authentication failure

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.

530: Authentication required

This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

374
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of
SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by
employing SMTP server.
Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP
server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and
etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some
additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries.
Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also.
In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System can not be applied for
Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function.
Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization's Intranet.
Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication
between Internet Fax communications.

Several service extensions are newly assigned.

(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command

Sender Recipient
Establish TCP connection
TCP Port No. 25
220

EHLO
Check for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG Capability contents sample
250-<[email protected]> recipient ok
MAIL FROM:<[email protected]> 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250 250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
RCPT TO:<[email protected]> CONNEG 250- (&(dpi=200)
Request for Capability 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250 Capacity Exchange 250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
Direct SMTP Overview 250 (ua-media=stationery) )

375
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

memo

376
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
Ver. 1.02
Model Drawing Name
General Circuit
DP-2310/3010
Diagram
nMRCLH4
2 INTERMEDIATE
14 +24VM
5 1 L1
13
ROLLER CLUTCH 3 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE 4 1 L2 1
12 LINE

CN22
3

CN392
11 nADF4 AGND

!
THE PARTS WITH ! MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC 2 2 PAPER FEED

CN773
+24VM 7 7
10 nCTON

CN20
1 1 CLUTCH 6
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES 9 6 1 1

!
nHKOF
5 5 2 2
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY 8 pCMLD
4 4
7 +24V

CN25
3 3 8

CN772
WHEN SERVICING IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY 6 EXT.TEL GND

CN391
2 2 7
5 +5VP

MJR
CN390

MANUFACTURE'S SPECIFIED PARTS BE USED FOR

CN80

25 3 1 1 6
4

CN21
FXB
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS WITH 12 MGND 5
3 24 2 79 79
+24VM
1 4
CN56

11 23 80 80

CN811
! MARK OF THE SCHEMATIC. 2
10 22 3
1 nCSTOP4
10 Schematic Diagram

9 21 2
nJAMDOR4 GND 2 1
8 20 2
+24VM nFDPCHK4 nMRCLH3
pSPKOT 1
10.1. General Circuit Diagram

1 7 19 1
4th TRAY nUPLIMIT4 2 INTERMEDIATE
CN60 nLIFTM4 6 18 +24VM

SPEAKER
CN393

LIFT MOTOR 2 1
CN50 5

CN774
PCI 62*2 nCST4 ROLLER CLUTCH
5 17
4

CN771
nPCHK4
4 16
pLIFI4 3
LDJAM4 3 15 nADF3
2 2 PAPER FEED

CN806
USB I/F 3 3 nMRCLH4 +24VM
JAM COVER GND 2 14 1
2 2 nADF4 1 CLUTCH
SENSOR nJAMDOR4 1 13
1 1 N.C.

CN778
16 26
N.C.
12 25

CN64
CN62
CN63
CN65
15

FRM
FRM

SLOT 2

SLOT 1
4 N.C.

SORT

CARD
FROM
LD

CST2
11 LDCST4 14 12 nMRCLH2

CN808
N.C. 5 5

MEMORY
3 3 11 P/S 2 INTERMEDIATE
10 4th TRAY GND 13 4 4 +24VM
2 2 N.C. 1 27
9 12 10 N.C. 5 ROLLER CLUTCH
SENSOR nCST4 3 3 25
1 N.C. 4

CN777
8 1 9 MGND
11 2 2 23
N.C.

CN805
7 8 +24VM 3
10 nADF2

3rd/4th TRAY
1 1 21
CN773

CST2

N.C. 2 2 PAPER FEED

6 LDFPCHK4 9 7 +24VM

DRIVE MOTOR
3 3 19

CN61
N.C. 1 1

LAN I/F
5 REGISTRATION GND 8 6 CLUTCH

KEY I/F
2 2 17
N.C.

CN67
CN68
CN69
4 SENSOR nFDPCHK4 7 5
1 1 15

CN776
GND 4
3 6 LDJAM2

HARDWARE
3 13

CN770
LDUPL4 +5V 3 3
2 5 JAM COVER GND
3 6 MGND 2 2 nLIFTM2 11
1 UPPER LIMIT GND 4 2 SENSOR nJAMDOR2
2 5 1 1
2 2nd TRAY 9
pUPLMT4 +24VM 1 +24VM
CN778

SENSOR 1 4 3 1 LIFT MOTOR 7

CN774

GND LDPHK4 26
8 3 3 2 5
NO PAPER GND
4
LDCST2

CN775
7 2 2 1 nLIFTM3 3
2 3 3

JTAG I/F
3rd TRAY

RISC I/F
SENSOR nPCHK4

CN75
CN74
CN73
6 1 1 17 +24VM 2nd TRAY GND 1
2

CN804
1 2
CN58

CSSRXD LIFT MOTOR

18 SENSOR MGND
CN777

5 12 26
1 nCST2 1 24
CSSTXD +24VM
4 4

CN66
24

SUPER PYXION TEST

11 23
3 3 10 22
3 LDFPCHK2 22

SC
3
2 2 REGISTRATION 2 GND 9 nCSTOP 20
+5V 2 21

CSS I/F
1 1 SENSOR nFDPCHK2 nJAMDOR2 18
1 1 8 20
CN776

CST3
nFDPCHK2 16
7 19
CDSSOL LDUPL3 LDUPL2 nUPLIMIT2 14
CDS 2 6 6 3 6 3 6 6 18
CN771

+24VM UPPER LIMIT GND UPPER LIMIT nCST2 12

SOLENOID 1 5 5 2 5 2 GND 5 5 17
CDSN1 SENSOR pUPLIMIT3 SENSOR pUPLMT2 nPCHK2 10
4 4 4 1 4 1 4 4 16
nMMPOa
3 1 VCDS LDPHK3 LDPHK2 pLIFT2 8
+24M CDS 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 15

CN714
2 2 pMRCLH2
CN800

CDSN2 NO PAPER GND NO PAPER 6

CN775

pIMMPOa SENSOR 2 2 2 2 2 2 GND 2 2 14

1 3 GND SENSOR nPCHK3 SENSOR nPCHK2 pADF2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 4
nMMPOb

MOTOR
6 4 2
+24M

CN791
5 5 28
pIMMPOb 18

TRANSPORT
4 6 20

CNEXFDM
3 17
19
2 MGND 26
18 18 GND 18
16
+24VM
LDDOR +5V 1 15 25
CN810

EXFD
3 9 17 17 17 14 14 nOP3FDIN
DOOR GND nOPTRP 14 12
CN707

2 8 16 16 16 13 13 N.C.
SENSOR nDOOR nTRPJAM N.C. 13 11
1 7 15 15 15 12 12 nOP3ENB AGND
nTRPSEN4 LDJAM3 12 10 39 39
LDEX4 3 3 nOP3FDIN AGND
3 6 14 14 14 JAM COVER GND 11 11 nOP3FLD 40 40
PAPER TRANSPORT GND nTRPSEN3 2 2 11 9
2 5 13 13 13 10 nOP3FLD +5V
SENSOR 1 nJAMDOR3 10 nOP3FCK 37 37
nEXDF4 nTRPSEN2 1 nOP3ENB 10 8
CN802

UNIT SENSOR 4 1 4 12 12 12 9 nOP3FOT AGND 38

9 38

CN794
CN770

LDEX3 nTRPSEN1 nOP3FOT 9 7

3 11 11 11 8 8 nOP3RST +5V 35
3 8 6 35
PAPER TRANSPORT GND pTRPKEP2 4 nOP3FCK +12V
2 2 10 10 10 LDCST3 7 7 nOP3FLT 36 36

CN790
3 7 5
CN807

UNIT SENSOR 3 nEXDF3 pTRPKEP1 3 nOP3FLT

CN718
1 1 9 9 9 GND GND +3.3V
3rd TRAY 2 6 6 33 33
CN772

pTRPMDB 2 nOP3RST 6 4
8 8 8 nCST3 5 +5V +12V 34
SENSOR 1 5 34
CN801

pTRPMDA 1 GND 5 3
LDEX2 +3.3V
3 6 7 7 7 4 4 MGND 31 31
PAPER TRANSPORT GND pTRPMNB +5V 4 2 GND
2 5 6 6 6 LDFPCHK3 3 3 +24VM 32 32
nEXDF2 pTRPMNA 3 3 MGND 3 1
UNIT SENSOR 2 1 4 5 5 5 2 pBLKCLP
REGISTRATION GND 2 29 29
LDEX1 pVREF2 2 2 +24VM 2
3 4 4 4 1 1 GND 30
3 nFDPCHK3 30

CN793
GND pVREF1 SENSOR 1 1 1
PAPER TRANSPORT nOE
CN803

2 2 3 3 3 27 27
UNIT SENSOR 1 nEXDF1 MGND SDI
1 1 2 2 2 28 28
+24VM nCLPIN
1 1 1 25 25
nKEEP2 20 nSEN1
3 26 26
EXFD +24VM 19 GND
2 23 23
SOLENOID nKEEP1 TxOUT0-

CN792
1 24 24
TEMPSN TxOUT1-
21 21
VOUTB 4 4
TxOUT0+
1

20 4 GND 22
2 VINA HUMIDITY 3 3 22
WEB WEBSOL 19 3 HUMSN TxOUT1+
G1

19
SIZE

12 12 GND SENSOR 2 2 19
SOLENOID +24VM 18 GND GND
CN55

1 11 11 2 +5V 6 8 20 20
CN705

1 1 GND
LDESEN 17 +5V TxCLKOUT-
SENSOR

10 10 1 5 12 6 17 17
3 GND
EXIT 16 GND GND
CCD

2 9 GND 9 8 4 7 5 18 18
IPTXD +24V TxCLKOUT+
SENSOR nESEN 15 VOUTX 7 2
(Option)

1 8 8 3 1 15 15

CS4HT

CCDHT
GND
CN724

LDHTJ 14 VINX 6 2 3 TG
3 7 7 16 16
GND GND IPRXD
JAM 6 6 13 5 1 4 nGARST 13
2 12 13
nHTJAM +5V
SENSOR 1 12 4 11 nSYNC 14
CN721

5 5 14

1
2
4 LEDZ 11 CN3
THERMB2 11 3 +24VHL GND
3 10
Finisher Connector

13 5

1
2
4 4 5 11
CN850

THERMISTOR LEDY 10 11
2 10 2 2 MGND 9 MCLK-
ASSEMBLY 1 3 THERMB1 3 LEDX
TOTAL 12 4 4 12 12
1 9
SIZE SENSOR 3

9 1 nPMON N.C.
LSU

CN710

11 9
M

2 2 THERMA2 2 COUNTER 1 nCOUNT 3 3 9

377
THERMISTOR THERMA1
8 nPMRDY
1 1 1 8 8 10 2 2 10 MCLK+ 10

1
2
ASSEMBLY 2 +24VM
MOTOR

VOUTA 7 PMCK
7 7 N.C.
CN725

BYPASS FEED 2 nHDF 6

9 1 1 7 7
VINA POWCNTV
6 6 CLUTCH +24VM 8 GND 8
GND
1 5 1 8 8
CN715

CNN 5 5 GND LDI- GND

7 7 4 1 4 5

1
2
1
2
+5V 4 2 5
4 4 PFCLCNT RETRACE LDI+ SCLK-
2 PAPER FEED 2 6 3 6 3 2 3 6 6
LEDC 3
CN701

CN172 CN173 1 3 3 +24VM LDEN GND GACLK+

CLUTCH 1 5 4 5 2 3 2 3 3
+5V 2 HSYNC +3.3V
CN57

2 2 2 4 4 1 4 SCLK+ 4
5 1 4
RLB
1
SIZE SENSOR 3

1 1 LEDA 1 REGISTRATION nRRCLH nS/H GACLK-

2 3 6 3 1 1
SW4

ROLLER +24VM GND GND

CNL 2
CN1

1 2 7 2
LSU

CN171 CLUTCH 2
LDMFR L+5V
13 6 3 1 8 1
3
1

+24VD2 GND
3 3 12 5 2 PAPER PATH
nMFRCHK OPCCNT CN2
2 2 4 1 SENSOR 2 nFNRDTB
+24VD1
11 OPC DRUM 18 3
ILS

1 LDMFP +24VM MGND

1 10 3 3 SCANNER
CN708

GND CLUTCH 1 17 2
ACLRLB

NO PAPER
ACNRLB

9 2 +24VFB FAN
2 16 1
nMFPCK SENSOR
nFNRDTL 8 1 1 nFNRDT
15
2
1

E
2 14 3
SPC

LDMF4 3 MGND EXHAUST

MGND 7 7 3 14 2
3 12 GND SHEET BYPASS 2 +24VFL
FAN
LSU

CN134 +24VFP 6 6 2 13 1 FAN

! 1 10 nMFSEN4 SENSOR 1 CN53
1 LDRSEN
CN728 CN727

White N nFNRDTP 5 5 12
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN712

CN131

13 3
22
21
20
19
16
17
18
15
14
13
12
11
10

3 nB4SEN REGISTRATION
E 4 GND
NFL

! MGND 4 4 11 2
CN133 CN132 2 11 GND ROLLER
Black
FAN

L +24VFP 3 3 3 nRSEN
1
LVPS

1
2
3
2
1

10 1 9 nA3SEN
10 SENSOR
2 SNS nLIFT1
GND
GND
GND
GND
nATT

2 2 LDCST
BD_A

POWER CORD 9 GND 8 1st TRAY 2 9

nPACK

IICSCL
nVRDY
nPRDY

nSACK

IICSDA

3
nSREQ
nVREQ

+5V 1 +24VM GND

SPCTXD

INLET 1st TRAY

SPCRXD
nDUREQ

pZCIN 1 1
nSENTIM

LIFT MOTOR 1
nDUPACK

pSPCRST

8
ACN
ACL
ACL
ACN
nPVSYNC

8 7 2
nPRGDWN

CN706

nCASET
CN709

nSSR3 14 7 1 SENSOR
3
2
1

6
2
1

7
CN704

nSSR2 8 6 LDUPL
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

6 5 3
22
21
20
19
16
17
18
15
14
13
12
11
10

CN104 CN101 MGND

GND
UPPER
nSSR1 4 9 9 nMMCK 7 5
5 TR1 2 LIMIT
+5V 8 8 4 4 6 pUPLIMIT1 CN717
4 3 nMMRDY 4 1 SENSOR
CN106

TR0 3 3
+24VD1 7 7 5 LDPS
3 2 nMMON 3 3
CNMT2

1 2 2 DR1 2 2 GND
ACSW 6 6 4 2 NO PAPER
1 MGND 2
CN700

2 1 1 2 DR0 1 1 CN716
5 5 3 nPCHK1 SENSOR
CN108

1 1
9
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2

3 1 16
49
50
47
48
45
46
11
12
10

CN713

CR2
L1

CN103
CSS I/F

4 4 2
ACD
CNHV

15 CR1 MGND
2 2
HVPS

3 3 1
MAIN MOTOR

For Europe +24VM

CR0 1 1
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V

! 2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

2
CNMT1
+5VP
FLNG

Only +24VHL
SW
SW
SPOW

CN723 CN722
DALTH
pFLON

SDS2
DACLK

SDS1

ACL
24LELS

DADATA

1 1 CN720
1 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

24
23
22
20
19
18
17
15
14
11
10

+24V +24VD1
CN105 2 2 4 1
ACN

MGND
3
2
1
CN1

CN102
9
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2

3
49
50
47
48
45
46
11
12
10

2
ACN

3
TED

ACL
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

LDTF

LDBT
12 TFSN

21 BTHP
VTED
TDSN

MGND
+24VM
+24VM
+24VM
+24VM
TDREF

13 LDWTD

16 BMCNT
WTBSN

2 3
CN2
CN703

SDR
ELPCNT

CN658
GOPSW1

+24V
nTNSCLH

5
1 CN651
6

8
5
3
2
1

9
4

1
2
10

1
CN7

L2
3
2
1
1
2

SDR
3
2
1

GND
11
1
!

3
2

8 8
1

6
5
4
2
3

CN64 10
7 7 10
2
1
5
2
3
4
1

GND LDDUP1 +5V

2 6 6 6 9 3 40 40
Only
3
4
2
1

STRVP GND DUAL-PATH +5V

1 GND 5 8 2 39 39
CN4

5 5 10
3
2
1

CN65

GND nDUPSEN1 1 SENSOR 2 WTS TONER MGND

4 7 38 38
LED

4 4 9
GND LD2WAY DENSITY +24V
For Europe

To CN144 9 6 37 37
TST

8 8 3
CN142

3 3 GND
LAMP

Pin 5, 6 GND 5 DUAL-PATH SENSOR nDADFON

2 2 7 7 8 2 36 36
CN719

FUSER LAMP 2
FUSER LAMP 1
!

GND n2WAYSEN GND

CLUTCH

SENSOR 1
LVS1 !

2 1 1 7 4 1 BM 35 35
6 6
!
!

+5V n2WAYKEP2
SENSOR

MGND
SCANNING

1 3 3 3 34 34
TONER
WASTE

5 5
TONER EMPTY

CN66

+5V +24VM PAPER STOPPER MGND

CN144
SENSOR

CN3 4 4 2 2 2 33 33
TFU
LVS2 !
CN702
DETECT SENSOR

n2WAYKEP1
TONER BOTTLE

+5V SOLENOID DAA1 2 LVS1

1 32
5
4
3
2
1

3 3 1 1 32
TONER BOTTLE

+5V GND 1
TONER

HOME POSITION
4
1

MOTOR

31 31
BOTTLE

2 2 GND CN2
CN651

GND +5VD +5VP +24V CN181

1 1 13 30 30
12 GND
29
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

12 29 LFB
+5V LDDUP4 +24V
DC

11 11 CN182
5
4
3
2
1

4 5 1 3 28 28
GND CN142 GND DUPLEX pADATA1B
2
1

8 3 10 10 2 27 27
SOLENOID

3 CN141
GND nDUPSEN4 SENSOR 3 pADATA1A
F 2 10 4 CN143 9 9 1 26 26
SOLENOID

CN59
CN145

+12V LDDUP3 ASTROAD1

CN143

HDD 40P

F
CNHD1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

8 8 25 25
CNSHD1

2 3
15
14
13
12
11
10

1 13 CN141
STAMP

DCB

GND DUPLEX ACLOCKAD1

5
2
1
3
4

7 2
1
2

7 24 24
SENSOR

nDUPSEN3 nCCLH3
RELEASE LEVER

SENSOR 2 SNS
DUPLEX 2 GUIDE
PLATE SOLENOID

SOLENOID

LENGTH

6 6 1 23 23 INV
LENGTH

CN182
+5V
REVERSING GUIDE 1

+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
ADF COVER

LDDUP2
ORIGINAL

+24V

+24V
+5VP

nCCLH2
ORIGINAL

+5VD

+3.3V
+3.3V
SENSOR 1

SENSOR
SENSOR 2

HDD 5 CN41 22 22
CN711

5 3 3 3
GND
nLPOW2
nLPOW1

4
GND DUPLEX nCCLH1 FLNG 1
1
2
3

1
2
3
1
2
3
4

4 4 2 21 21 2 2
READ POINT
CN1
CN2

1
nDUPSEN2 SENSOR 1 nASTAMP nFLON
ADF

4
CN181

20
1
2
3

3 3 1
1
2

20
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2

1 1
OPEN DETECTION

13
12
11
10
CN656

DUPCLH1 nAPICR
2 2
1
2
3

1
2
3

+24VM 2 19 19
CN51 DUPLEX nAPACHG
CN650

1 1 1 18 18 LFB
CLUTCH nAKEEP2
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v

IOUTB
GND
GND
GND
GND

17
nAPICR

CN52 17 6 6
+24VOPF
nAKEEP1
nAKEEP2
+24VOPC
+24VOPC

nAOAC

nAKEEP1
nAPACHG

+24V
+24VOPF

nAADL1
nAADL2
nAB4S
nAA3S

nAB1SN

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nASTAMP

16 16
GND
+5v

5
15
14
13
12
11
10
18
17
16

2
nAOAC OUTB
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
6
7
3
4
5
1
2

17 15 4 4
10

6
CN21

14 nAREV IOUTA
16 14 3 1
MOTOR

5 CN29 CN28 CN25 CN26

KCDET nAEJC +24V
CN655

15 4 13 1 13 2 5
nAB1SN
G6
SCANNING

GND OUTA
14 3 CN27 CN30 CN24 CN22 12 12 1 3
nKCNT
KEY nAB2SN
CN726
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

3
2
1

13 11 11
11
10

2
+5V

+24VM COUNTER nAADL2

GND
GND
+24V
+5VP

12 1 10 10
SLPKY
pPTXD
BZCLK
BZOFF

pPRXD
nWAKE

LPOW1
LPOW2

nAADL1 GND
PNLDO1

GND
nPNLRST

9
PNLSCK1
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v

11 2 2 9 3 3
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V

HOME
OUTA

OUTB

nAA3S ORI
IOUTA

POWSW
IOUTB

nAEJC

nAREV

10 1 1 8 8 2 2
nAB2SN
nCCLH3
nCCLH1
nCCLH2

POSITION
nAAPNT
+24VOPF
+24VOPF
+24VOPF

nAB4S +5V
SW3

CN222

9 7 7 1 1 SENSOR
CN657

N.C.
6
6
5
4
3
2
1

4
1
4
1

3
2
1
3
2
1

3
2
1
4
1

3
2
1

F 8 6
CN223
G5

nAAPNT
5 5
LCD

7
+24V
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

6
15
14
13
12
11
10
ADF

GND
5 3 3
EJECT

CN226 CN220 CN227 MGND

ROLLER
CLUTCH
MOTOR

CLUTCH
CLUTCH

4 2 2
SENSOR

SENSOR
SENSOR

SENSOR

+5VP
ORIGINAL

1 1
INVERTING

3
DETECTION
ADF ROLLER

2
PNL1
DUPLEX EJECT
FEED 2 ROLLER

1 2
ADF EXIT COVER

CN229 CN230 1
!
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN221

15
14
13
12
11
10
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

4
3
2
1

GND
E

CN2 3 3
VCNT
2 2 F F
+24V
CN1

1 1
CN224

INV
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

4 4
15
14
13
12
11
10
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

Y2 GND
4 3 3 2
X2
CN280 CN250 nADFSES
Touch 3 2 2 1
CN652

Y1
CN290
PNL4

CN251

2 BA PNL2 1 1
CN225

Panel X1 PNL3
1
DEC 2003
DP-2310/3010
 DP-2310/3010

10.2. Finisher Circuit Diagram

PGND

+5V

I/F CONNECTOR
1 3 TOP
SGND
+24V 2 2 COVER
1

CN1
1 TCS

CN2
3 1 SENSOR
2 2 +5V
PGND 4 3
3 3 SGND
5 2 IN SENSOR
4 INS
6 1
5
6
RXD
7 5
SGND
8 4

CN7
9
10
TXD
SGND
3
2
CONT 1
2
+5V
SGND
AHPS
3
2
HOME POSITION
ADJUSTMENT
1 3 1 SENSOR

CN3
11 +5V
12 4 3
SGND DISCHARGE
13 5 2
EXS
1
SENSOR
14 6
7

+24V
STAPLE 1 1 +24V

CN8
COVER 2 2 1 1 PADDLE
PDSOL
SCSW
FINISHER CONTROL

CN4
SWITCH 3 3 2 2 SOLENOID
SCSW
BUNDLE 1 4
DISCHARGE UNIT 2
SWITCH 3
BDUSW
5
6 PC BOARD 1
+24V
1 LARGE GEAR

CN9
LGSOL
2 2 SOLENOID
3

+24V
1 4
SPDM- SVSOL1
1 1 2 3 SURFACE VIEW
SPDM- SVSOL2
2 2 3 2 SOLENOID
+5V

CN10
SPDM+
STAPLER

3 3 4 1
SPDM+ SGND
4 4 5 3
5
SCS
5 6
SVS
2 SURFACE VIEW

CN6
LSS
7
+5V
1
SENSOR
6 6
SHPS SGND
7 7 8 1
SULS PRS PUSH LEVER
8 8 9 2
SGND
3
SENSOR
9 9
+5V
10 10
SPS
11 11
12
13
TPM *A
1 1
TPM A
2 2
+24V

CN12

MOTOR
3 3
+24V

DRIVE
4 4
TPM B
5 5
TPM *B
6 6
7
8
TRAY UNIT 9
10
TEDM+ 11
TRAY ELEVATION 1 8 1
MOTOR 2 TEDM-
7 2 APM B
TFS 1 4
1 6 3

CN11
NEAR FULL APM *B
SGND 2 3 SURFACE VIEW
2 5 4
CN5

SENSOR APM A
3 4
+5V
5 3 2 SOLENOID
APM *A
3 UVS 6 4 1
1
UPPER LIMIT SGND 7
2 2
SENSOR +5V
3 1 8

+5V
1 1

CN14
2
SGND
2
JOINT
3
JTS
3
SENSOR
4

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

THE PARTS WITH ! MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY
WHEN SERVICING IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY
MANUFACTURE'S SPECIFIED PARTS BE USED FOR
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS WITH
! MARK OF THE SCHEMATIC.

Model Drawing Name

Finisher Circuit
DP-2310/3010
Diagram

Ver. 1.02 378 DEC 2003

 DP-2310/3010

11 Finisher Option (DA-FS300)

11.1. General Description
11.1.1. Features
1. Compact and light weight

2. Sorting and stapling by shift-sort

Sheet Stacking, matching, offset stacking, and stapling are performed on a Halfway-processing Tray.

3. Stack Tray loading

The Stack Tray is capable of holding approximately 500 small-sized sheets, or 250 large-sized sheets.
11.1.2. Specifications

Item Description Remarks

Stacking 1 location
Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
Feed Reference Center reference
Stacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, B4, B5, B5-R
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS
Paper Weight 17 - 24 lb (64 - 90 g/m2)
Mode Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Stack Height Non-Sort Note 1, 2
Small-size: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R,LTR, LTR-R
Large-size : 250 sheets
A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS
Shift-Sort
Small-size: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LTR, LTR-R
Large-size : 250 sheets
A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS
Staple
Small-size : 10- 30 sheets; 45-16 sets
2-9 sheets; 70-50 sets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LTR, LTR-R
Large-size : 10- 20 sheets; 25-12 sets
2-9 sheets; 70-28 sets
A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS
Paper Detection No
Control Panel No
Display No
Size 7.17 x 19.61 x 10.12 in Excluding the
(W x D x H) (182 x 498 x 257 mm) installation kit
Weight Approx. 22 lb (10 kg)
Power Supply 24 VDC from Host machine
Maximum Power Less than 48 W
Consumption
Stapling Rotary cam type

379
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
Item Description Remarks
Stapling Position Rear 1-Point stapling
Refer to the illustration as follows.
Stapling Thickness Small-size : 30 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LTR, LTR-R
Large-size : 20 sheets
A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS
Staple Supply Cartridge of Staples (3,000/Cartridge)
Replacement Staples FQ-SS32
Staple Detection Yes
Stapling Size A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS
Manual Stapling None
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 80 g/m2 paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes or Staple/Shift-Sort modes.
Stapling Position:
6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in

6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in

Delivery direction

380
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.1.3. Electrical Components

Name Notation Description

Motor 1 Feed Motor
2 Alignment Motor
3 Stack Tray Elevation Motor
Solenoid 4 Paddle Solenoid
5 Large Gear Solenoid
6 Paper Detection Solenoid
Stapler Unit 7 Stapler Unit
Micro Switch 8 Staple Safety detection
9 Stapler Cover detection
Photo-interrupters 10 Upper Cover Open detection
11 Inlet Paper detection
12 Aligning Home Position Plate detection
13 Paper Exit detection
14 Stack Tray Paper Height detection
15 Paper Hold Lever detection
16 Stack Tray Upper Limit detection
17 Paper Full detection
18 Finisher Detachment detection

11.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User

No. Item Timing

1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted
(indicator on Host machine's Control Panel)

381
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.2. Maintenance and Inspection
11.2.1. Periodic Part Replacement
The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.2.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components may require replacement due to wear, deterioration or damage. Replace them as
required.

11.2.2.1. Finisher Unit

No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks

A single cartridge
1 Stapler GH03-7811 1 200,000 operations
contains 3,000 staples.

11.2.2.2. Scheduled Maintenance

Item Interval Description Remarks

Feeding Assembly Roller
Wipe with clean cloth
Feeding Assembly Member Shortest cleaning interval of the
Cleaning moistened in water.
Paper Path Guide Host machine
Transmission Type Sensor Wipe with a dry cloth.

382
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.2.3. Disassembly and Assembly
<Removing Finisher Cover Assembly>
(1) Open and hold the Finisher Cover (2608).
(2) Release the Front and Rear Arms (2609 and
2610).
(3) Release the Rear Latch and remove the
Finisher Cover (2608).

(4) Remove 1 Screw (2633).

(5) Remove the Front Cover Assembly (2601).
Note:
When re-installing the Cover, make sure 1 Latch
Hook is in the hole and the Release Lever works
correctly.

(6) Remove 1 Screw (2521).

(7) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly (2605).
Note:
When re-installing the Cover, make sure 2 Latch
Hooks are in the holes.

<Removing Finisher Tray Cover Assembly>

(8) Remove 2 Screws (2521).
(9) Remove the Tray Assembly (2515).

383
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

<Removing Finisher Controller PC Board>

(10) Remove 2 Screws (2632) and 2 Washers
(2634).
(11) Remove the Right Cover (2604).

(12) Lift the PCB Cover Mylar (2635) up.

(13) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the CONT PC

Board.
(14) Remove 1 Screw (2633).
(15) Remove the CONT PC Board (3028).

<Removing Rollers>
(16) Lift up the Guide Base (2801) Assembly.
(17) Clean the Exit Roller (2937).

384
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(18) Disconnect the Harness.

(19) Remove 1 Screw (2521) and 1 Screw (2631).
(20) Remove the Guide Base (2832) Assembly.

(21) Release the Tension Spring (3024) and Latch,

and then remove the Lock Arm (3025).

(22) Remove the Tension Spring (3024).

(23) Remove 1 Snap Ring (3023).
(24) Remove the Lock Lever Shaft (3020) Assembly
as illustrated.

(25) Loosen 1 Screw (2706).

(26) Remove 2 Screws (2632).

385
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(27) Remove the Upper Guide Assembly as

illustrated.

Note:
When re-installing, rotate the Timing Belt
counter-clockwise and then fasten 1 Screw.

(28) Remove 1 Snap Ring (2734).

(29) Remove the Feed Roller Gear (2702).
(30) Remove the Bushing (2919).

(31) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly (2911).

386
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(32) Remove the Feed Arm Assembly (2913).

(33) Remove 1 Screw (2521) and 1 Screw (2633).

(34) Remove the Tray Guide Assembly (2611).

(35) Disconnect 3 Harnesses (2629).

Note:
When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are
connected correctly as illustrated.

387
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(36) Remove 1 Snap Ring (2734).

(37) Remove the Exit Roller Gear (2701).

(38) Remove the Bushing (2919).

(39) Lift up the Guide Base (2801) Assembly.

(40) Lift up the Paper Guide (2921).
(41) Remove the Exit Roller Assembly (2936) as
illustrated.

<Removing the Staple Unit>

(42) Remove 1 Screw (2943).
(43) Remove the Staple Safety Switch (2941).
(44) Release the Harness (2629) from the Harness
Clamp.
(45) Disconnect the Harness (2629).

388
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(46) Remove 2 Screws (2521).

(47) Remove the Staple Unit (2938) Assembly.

Note:
When re-installing, ensure that Staple Unit
Assembly is installed (hooked) correctly as
illustrated.

(48) Remove 2 Screws (2736).

(49) Loosen 1 Screw.
(50) Remove the Staple Unit (2938).

<Removing the Finisher Interface Cable>

(51) Remove 2 Screws (2633).
(52) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamps.
(53) Disconnect 2 Harnesses and remove the
Finisher Interface Cable.

389
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

<Removing the Motors>

(54) Disconnect the Harness.
(55) Remove 2 Screws (3030).
(56) Remove the Sensor Hold Bracket (3008).

(57) Remove 2 Screws (2633).

(58) Remove the Drive Motor (3014).

(59) Disconnect the Harness.

(60) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(61) Remove 4 Screws (2632).

(62) Remove 2 Screws (2521).
(63) Remove the Slide Base Bracket (3003).

390
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010

(64) Remove 2 Screws (2521).

(65) Remove the Set Motor (2931) Assembly.

(66) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

(67) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

Note:
When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are
connected correctly as illustrated.

(68) Remove 2 Screws (2942).

(69) Remove the Set Motor (2931).

391
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.3. Operation and System Description
11.3.1. Outline of Operation
DA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication and carry out the following 3
operation modes.

• Normal Exit
Discharge the paper into the Stack Tray.

• Staple Exit
Jog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, then staple when they reach the specified
number, and discharge into the Stack Tray.

• Shift Exit
Jog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into the
Stack Tray.

11.3.2. Stapling Mechanism

Stapling Mechanism 1.
FQ-SS32
Staple Cartridge
Staple Motor

Cam

Staple Sensor

Cartridge
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Table
• The stapler's motor rotation drives the stapler by the rotating cam via gear.
• The link is in contact with the cam. When the cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.

Stapling Mechanism 2.

Cam

Staple Plate

Staple Table

392
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.3.3. Electrical Parts (Motor and Solenoid Functions)
11.3.3.1. Feed Motor Control
1. Feed Motor, which moves Paper Feed, Paddle Drive, Stack Delivery Unit Elevation, is 1-2 phase
exciting type, 2 phase stepping motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Each signal pulse output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and
rotates the coil in each phase. The Motor drive current is controlled by the duty cycle from P24 of IC2.
3. Motor stops when the output signals from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 are changed to H and the power
supply to the motor coils are cut off.

11.3.3.2. Alignment Motor Control

1. The Alignment Motor, which jogs papers in the stack and carries out offset operation in Paper Exit Unit,
is a W1-2 phase exciting type, 2-phase stepping pulse motor. Its control is shown below.
2. Each signal pulse output from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and
rotates the coil in each phase. And it combines with this output and is IC2. The electromagnetic
excitation is changed by the output of P14 and P15, and it controls the W1-2 phase exciting drive.
3. Motor stops when the output signals from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 are changed to H and the power
supply to the motor coils are cut off.

393
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.3.3.3. Elevation Motor Control
1. Elevation Motor, which moves Stack Tray up and down, is a +24V DC brush motor. The control circuit
is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P52 and P53 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). Stack
Tray is elevated when H is output from P52 and P53 respectively, and Stack Tray is descended when H
and L are output from P52 and P53 respectively.
3. Motor stops and brakes when L and H are output from P52 and P53.

11.3.3.4. Staple Motor Control

1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC brush motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from PF1, PF0 and P50 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).
Stapling is done when L, L and H are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively. Staple is at home
position when H, L and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively.
3. Staple Motor stops and brakes when L, H and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 for forward and
reverse rotations.

394
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 DP-2310/3010
11.3.3.5. Large Gear Solenoid Control
1. An up-and-down motion of the Delivery Unit is performed by changing the drive of feed motor, which is
controlled by the Large Gear Solenoid. If the Large Gear Solenoid is turned on during rotation of the
feed motor, the Delivery Unit will move up and will be opened widely. When the Large Gear Solenoid is
turned off, the Delivery Unit will move down and will be closed.The Solenoid is driven by +24V DC. Its
control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the signal from P27 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P27 is H, the Large
Gear Solenoid is turned on.

11.3.3.6. Paddle Solenoid Control

1. Paddle Solenoid switches the drive of the feed motor to the Paddle, which is a Flapper typed Solenoid
and is operated by +24V DC. The control circuit is shown below.
2. Solenoid is turned ON and drives the Paddle when the signal H is transmitted from PG0 of IC2 in
P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).

11.3.3.7. Paper Detection Solenoid Control

1. A +24V DC plunger solenoid along with a paper detection lever is used for detecting the height of the
paper delivered to the Stack Tray. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the signal from P26 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P26 is H, the Solenoid is
turned on to pull the paper detection lever inside. When the P25 is H, the Solenoid is turned off to push
the paper detection lever outside.

395
Ver. 1.02 DEC 2003
 Panasonic
88

Software

Operating Instructions
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3

DZSD001829-5
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS ........................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models.............................................................................................. 3

2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool ......................................................................................... 4
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool..................................................................................... 5

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code.................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 For DP-2310/3010/3510/4510/6010 6
3.1.2 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code ................................................................................................................. 6

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7

1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1
3rd Edition : 2002 December 5
4th Edition : 2003 April 10
5th Edition : 2003 April 22

Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2002-2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.

The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Page 2
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.

1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
• DP-2310 / 3010
• DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010
• DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

Note:
1. Depending on the country, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. The DX-800 works only when it's firmware is Version 1.31 or higher.
.

Page 3
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
Start Microsoft Windows.
1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

2.
Enter the installation password.
3. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.

Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

4.
The message "Installation completed successfully" is displayed when the installation is
5. completed.

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
1. Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.

The Configuration dialog box appears.

2.
General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.

File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the “Local Firmware Folder”.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.

Click [OK] to finish the setup.

3.

Page 4
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

Start Microsoft Windows.

1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The message "Network Firmware Update Uninstall is completed" is displayed when the uninstall
4. is completed.

Page 5
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1 For DP-2310/3010/3510/4510/6010
1. If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000), it is not
possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default
Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.1.2 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value blank, it is not
possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default
Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note:
The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 6
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Note:
About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power
User is required.

2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].

Note:
1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application
are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update isn’t done properly and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20
minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the
Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.

3. Click [Device Address List].

Page 7
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

4. Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input or Device Address List.

Click [OK].

5. Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [Next>].

Page 8
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Specify the Firmware Code File using the

6 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders here.
Note:
1. Always update PNL, SC and SPC firmware as a set.
2. Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isn’t indicated.
3. The FAX field is not used for DX-600/800/DP-3510/4510/6010.
The DX-600/800 uses only the SC field.

6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe

Page 9
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6a3 Extracting...

6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

Page 10
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228

6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

Page 11
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders" and
click [Browse...] button.

6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and

click [OK].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder

and click [OK].

Page 12
 Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.

Click [Next>].

8. Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.

Then click [Next>].

Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are

transmitted separately and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
If you check "Send at once", all
firmware will be sent at once and then
erase, write and reboot. This "Send at
once", function cannot be used if the
firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit
SC version is V1.xxxx
(DP-3510/4510/6010).

Page 13
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].

10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started.
The Spooler window appears automatically
showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.

11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in

the spooler disappear and the communication
log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.

After each firmware code is successfully

programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.

Page 14
 Panasonic ®

Software

Operating Instructions
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3

DZSD000965-8
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS ........................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models.............................................................................................. 3

2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine................................................................ 4
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool.............................................................................................. 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool ......................................................................................... 6

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code.................................................................................... 7
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code ................................................................................................................. 7

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8

1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30
3rd Edition : 2000 September 8
4th Edition : 2000 November 28
5th Edition : 2001 June 20
6th Edition : 2001 September 7
7th Edition : 2003 April 10
8th Edition : 2003 April 22

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.

The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Page 2
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.

1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
• Windows 2000 / XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
Parallel Port Models
Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-130/135/150
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-2000/2500/3000
• DP-3510/4510/6010
• DX-2000
• UF-585 / 595
• UF-590 / 790
• UF-885 / 895 / 890 / 990
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-3510/4510/6010
• UF-E1
• UF-490/525
• UF-590/790

USB Port Models

Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-2310 / 3010
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-2310 / 3010

Note:
1. Depending on the country, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. Some UF-E1 models with the earlier versions of firmware will not support Parallel Firmware Update. Please
confirm whether your machine’s firmware version supports Parallel Firmware Update with your service provider.

Page 3
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
1 Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.

Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
2 your PC.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

Start Microsoft Windows.
1
For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.

2
Installation Destination Folder
3
Click [Next] button.

Program Folder
4
Click [Next] button.

Page 4
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Copying...
5

Installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool

6 and Parallel Update Driver are completed.
If you do not need to install USB Update
Driver, Click [Next>] to go to step 9.
Note: You can still install the USB Update Driver if
the USB cable is connected later.

If you need to install the USB Firmware Update

Driver, please set the unit to "Update from
USB" in Service Mode first, and then connect
the USB Cable. The required Driver will then
be installed automatically.

Searching...
7

Installing driver...
8

The installation is completed.

9

Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation.
3. For Windows 98, you cannot install the USB Firmware Update Driver and USB Printer Driver into the same PC. Please
delete the USB Printer Driver first and then install the USB Firmware Update Driver.

Page 5
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

2.3 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

Start Microsoft Windows.

1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The message "Local Firmware Update Uninstall is completed" is displayed when the uninstall is
4. completed.

Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.

Page 6
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note:
The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 7
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
1 cable or USB cable.

Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are
2 currently running. Status Monitor Port Controller
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on
3 the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].

Note: Please close all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.

Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

4 Parallel.
Click [Next>].

Page 8
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Specify the Firmware Code File by the

5 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 5b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.

5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe

Page 9
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

5a3 Extracting...

5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

Page 10
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327

5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

Page 11
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.

5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].

ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

Page 12
 Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

A selected Firmware Code File(s) are

6 indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.

On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.

Click [Next>].

The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

7

When there is more than one file to be

7a updated, follow the operation below.
The confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.

Note:
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
For USB Connected Unit: Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit
does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again
automatically. Set the unit back to USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service
Mode and continue the firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file and PNL
firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code file
transfer is finished and the unit returned to the Service Mode.
When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup. Click [Cancel] to close
the Printer Plug and Play window.

Page 13
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

When the transfers of all the firmware files are

8 finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.

Page 14
DZZSM00234